manual gps pathfinder office
TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder® OfficeUser Guide
Connection ManagerConfiguration Manager
Data Transfer UtilityDifferential Correction
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities
Volume 3
![Page 2: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
Pathfndr.bk Page 2 Thursday, June 17, 1999 11:02 AM
![Page 3: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
Version 2.80Part Number 31312-28-ENG
Revision BMarch 2001
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide
Volume 3
This volume contains manuals for the following software:
Connection ManagerConfiguration Manager
Data Transfer UtilityDifferential Correction Utility
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities
![Page 4: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
Corporate Office
Trimble Navigation Limited645 North Mary AvenuePost Office Box 3642Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642U.S.A.Phone: +1-408-481-8940, 1-800-545-7762Fax: +1-408-481-7744www.trimble.com
Copyright and Trademarks
© 1999–2001, Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved. For STL support, the GPS Pathfinder Office software uses the Moscow Center for SPARC Technology adaptation of the SGI Standard Template Library. Copyright © 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company, Copyright © 1996, 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc., Copyright © 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology. Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID® is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending.
Printed in the United States of America. Printed on recycled paper.
The Sextant logo with Trimble, ASPEN, Asset Surveyor, GeoExplorer, and GPS Pathfinder are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited, registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.
The Globe & Triangle logo, Trimble, 4000SSE, 4000SE, 4600LS, 7400MSi, Coordinate System Manager, Data Dictionary Editor, Geodetic Surveyor, Geodetic System Surveyor SSi, GIS Surveyor, GPSurvey, Land Surveyor II, Land Surveyor IID, Pathfinder Basic, Pathfinder Professional, PFINDER, Phase Processor, QuickPlan, TerraSync, TDC1, and TDC2, are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited.
MrSID® and LizardTech™ are trademarks of LizardTech, Inc. and are used with permission.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Release Notice
This is the March 2001 release (Revision B) of the GPS Pathfinder Office Software User Guide, part number 31312-28-ENG. It applies to version 2.80 of the GPS Pathfinder® Office software.
The following limited warranties give you specific legal rights. You may have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.
Software and Firmware License, Limited Warranty
This Trimble software and/or firmware product (the “Software”) is licensed and not sold. Its use is governed by the provisions of the applicable End User License Agreement (“EULA”), if any, included with the Software. In the absence of a separate EULA included with the Software providing different limited warranty terms, exclusions, and limitations, the following terms and conditions shall apply. Trimble warrants that this Trimble Software product will substantially conform to Trimble’s applicable published specifications for the Software for a period of ninety (90) days, starting from the date of delivery.
Warranty Remedies
Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties set forth above shall be, at Trimble’s option, to repair or replace any Product or Software that fails to conform to such warranty (“Nonconforming Product”), or refund the purchase price paid by you for any such Nonconforming Product, upon your return of any Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance with Trimble’s standard return material authorization procedures.
![Page 5: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer
These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to the extent that: (i) the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed, configured, interfaced, maintained, stored, and operated in accordance with Trimble’s relevant operator's manual and specifications, and; (ii) the Products and Software are not modified or misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for defects or performance problems resulting from (i) the combination or utilization of the Product or Software with products, information, data, systems or devices not made, supplied or specified by Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or Software under any specification other than, or in addition to, Trimble's standard specifications for its products; (iii) the unauthorized modification or use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage caused by accident, lightning or other electrical discharge, fresh or salt water immersion or spray; or (v) normal wear and tear on consumable parts (e.g., batteries).
THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY, AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES, RELATING TO PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION, PRODUCTION, INSTALLATION, OR DISTRIBUTION, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE OPERATION OR FAILURE OF OPERATION OF GPS SATELLITES OR THE AVAILABILITY OF GPS SATELLITE SIGNALS.
Limitation of Liability
TRIMBLE’S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT OR SOFTWARE LICENSE OR U.S.$25.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS, (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS), REGARDLESS OF WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
![Page 6: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
![Page 7: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
ContentsAbout This ManualRelated Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviTechnical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiYour Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiDocument Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
13 The Connection Manager UtilityIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Using the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21The Batch Processor Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Configuring the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Enabling the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25The Connection Manager Utility in Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26About the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Exiting the Connection Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
14 The Configuration Manager UtilityIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Starting the Configuration Manager Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
New. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 v
![Page 8: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
Contents
Password Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Use GPS Pathfinder Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Set Printer Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55List of Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Copy Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Paste Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Lock Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Unlock Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Status Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Window Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Cascade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58List of Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Help Topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59About Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
15 The Data Transfer UtilityIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Standalone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Component Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
vi GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 9: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
Contents
Add Device wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Create New Device Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Types of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
16 Data CollectorsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Preparing a Data Collector Running Asset Surveyor Software for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Data Collector Running the Asset Surveyor Software. . . . . . . . . . . 148
MC-V Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Connecting an MC-V Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . 149
TSC1 Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Connecting a TSC1 Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . . 151
TDC1 Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Connecting a TDC1 Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . . 154
TDC2 Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Connecting a TDC2 Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . . 157
GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Receiving an Almanac with GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector . . . 160Connecting a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector to
Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Preparing a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector for
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer 3
Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 GeoExplorer II Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Receiving an Almanac with GeoExplorer II Data Collector. . . 164Connecting a GeoExplorer II Data Collector to
Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Preparing a GeoExplorer II Data Collector for
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 vii
![Page 10: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
Contents
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer II Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
GeoExplorer Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Receiving an Almanac with a GeoExplorer Data Collector . . . 167Connecting a GeoExplorer Data Collector to Your Computer . . 167Preparing a GeoExplorer Data Collector for Data Transfer . . . 168File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer
Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Connecting a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector to Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Preparing a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
17 SoftwareIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 ASPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Connecting a Field Computer Running ASPEN to Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Preparing a Field Computer Running ASPEN for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Field Computer Running ASPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
TerraSync software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Connecting a CE Device To Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . 179Preparing a CE Device Running Terrasync for Data Transfer . . 179File Types You Can Transfer To or From a CE Device
Running the TerraSync Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
vi i i GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 11: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
Contents
18 GIS Devices and E-mailIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 GIS Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GIS Folder . . . . . 184 PC Card from a GIS Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Connecting a PC Card To Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 185File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GIS PC Card . . . . 185
E-Mail Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186File Types You Can Transfer To or From an
E-Mail Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
19 GPS ReceiversIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 4600LS Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Preparing a 4600LS Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . 193File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4600 Receiver . . . 193
Series 4000 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Preparing a Series 4000 Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . 194File Types You Can Transfer To or From a
Series 4000 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 4700 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Preparing a 4700 Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . 195File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4700 Receiver . . . 195
4800 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Preparing a 4800 Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . 196File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4800 Receiver . . . 196
4400 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Preparing a 4400 Receiver for Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . 197File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4400 Receiver . . . 197
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 ix
![Page 12: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
Contents
20 Types of FilesIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Almanac Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Devices You Can Transfer Almanac Files From . . . . . . . . . 201 Background Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Devices You Can Transfer Background Files To or From . . . . 202Base Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Devices You Can Transfer Base Data Files To or From . . . . . 203Configuration (.ccf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Devices You Can Transfer Configuration Files To. . . . . . . . 204Coordinate System (.cse, .dat) Export Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Devices You Can Transfer Coordinate System Export Files To or From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Data Dictionary (.ddf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Devices You Can Transfer Data Dictionary Files To or From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Ephemeris (.eph) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Devices You Can Transfer Ephemeris Files To or From. . . . . 209
Geoid Grid Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Devices You Can Transfer Geoid Grid Files To . . . . . . . . . 210
GIS Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Devices You Can Transfer GIS Data Files To or From . . . . . 211
Help (.hlp) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Devices You Can Transfer Help Files To . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Language (.lng) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Devices You Can Transfer Language Files To . . . . . . . . . . 214
Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Devices You Can Transfer Other Files To or From . . . . . . . 215
Raw Observations (.dat files) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Devices You Can Transfer Raw Observations To or From. . . . 216
Station/Session Tables (.tab files) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
x GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 13: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
Contents
Devices You Can Transfer Station/Session Tables To or From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Waypoint (.wpt) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Devices You Can Transfer Waypoint Files To or From . . . . . 218
21 TroubleshootingIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Trimble Diagnostic Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Connecting To Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
22 The Differential Correction UtilityIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Differential GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Factors Affecting Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Obtaining Optimal Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Base Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Centimeter Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Using Differential Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Starting Differential Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Selecting Rover Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Selecting Base Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Confirm Selected Base Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Specifying the Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Confirming Reference Position Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . 248Generating the Corrected Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Exiting the Differential Correction Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Differential Correction Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Local Search for Base Files Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Internet Search Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Provider Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 xi
![Page 14: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
Contents
Base Station Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Internet Server Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Security Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Confirm Selected Base Files Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Reference Position Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Confirm Reference Position Adjustments Dialog . . . . . . . . 275Differential Correction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Internet Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Using Internet Search (First Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Internet Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Select a Base Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Provider Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Performing Internet Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Preventing Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Evaluating Corrected Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Reasons for Incomplete or Inaccurate Correction . . . . . . . . 295Internet Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
23 GPS Pathfinder Office UtilitiesIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304The Batch Processor Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Starting the Batch Processor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Using the Batch Processor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Step 1: Using a Batch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Step 2: Setting Up Data Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Step 3: Setting Up Differential Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Step 4: Setting Up Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Step 5: Setting Up a User Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Exiting the Batch Processor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317The Batch Processor Utility Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
xi i GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 15: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
Contents
Differential Correction Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Grouping Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354When to Use the Grouping Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Starting the Grouping Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Using the Grouping Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Exiting the Grouping Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Grouping Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Combine Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Starting the Combine Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Using the Combine Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Exiting the Combine Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Combine Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
SSF Record Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Starting the SSF Record Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Using the SSF Record Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379SSF Record Editor User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Check SSF Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Starting the Check SSF Files Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Using the Check SSF Files Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Exiting the Check SSF Files Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Check SSF Files Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Change the Selected Input Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Check SSF Files Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
SSF to RINEX Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Starting the SSF to RINEX Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402SSF to RINEX Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403SSF to RINEX Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 xi i i
![Page 16: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
Contents
Text Conversion Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Starting the Text Conversion Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Text Conversion Utility Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
24 Standalone UtilitiesIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Using the Standalone Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415ADJUST2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
ADJUST2D Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417ASTOSSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
ASTOSSF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419DATREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
DATREF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420FOUR2SSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
FOUR2SSF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
LOAD Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425MULTIDAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
MULTIDAT Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427PFSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
PFSTAT Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429RAWTOSSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
RAWTOSSF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431RPDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
RPDD Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432SSFREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SSFREF Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433SSFTOASC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
SSFTOASC Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Index
xiv GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 17: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
About This ManualWelcome to the GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide. This manual describes how to install, set up, and use the GPS Pathfinder® Office software.
This software, together with its associated utilities, provides all the functionality you need to correct, view, and edit GPS data collected in the field, and to export it in a format suitable for your GIS or CAD system.
Even if you have used other Global Positioning System (GPS) products before, Trimble recommends that you spend some time reading this manual to learn about the special features of this product.
If you are not familiar with GPS, visit our website for an interactive look at Trimble and GPS at:
• www.trimble.com
Trimble assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Windows and know how to use a mouse, select options from menus and dialogs, make selections from lists, and refer to online help.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 xv
![Page 18: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
About This Manual
Related InformationOther manuals in this set include:
• GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide
This manual introduces the basic principles of using the GPS Pathfinder Office software. A tutorial introduces some of the powerful features of the main program and the Batch Processor, Data Transfer, Differential Correction and Export utilities.
• Mapping Systems General Reference
This manual introduces the basic principles of using GPS to make maps. It provides the background information you need to use Trimble Navigation Limited’s mapping products, including GPS receivers, dataloggers, and software.
Other sources of related information are:
• Help – the software has built-in, context-sensitive help that lets you quickly find the information you need. Access it from the Help menu. Alternatively, click the Help button in a dialog, or press [F1]. This comprehensive help system reads like an online manual. Use the scroll buttons to move from page to page.
• Readme.txt file – a Readme.txt file contains information added after the documentation was completed. To read this file, double-click it or use a text editor to open it. The installation program also copies it into the program directory.
• Release notes – the release notes describe new features of the product, information not included in the manuals, and any changes to the manuals.
• Update notes – there is a warranty activation sheet with this product. Send it in to automatically receive update notes containing important information about software and hardware changes. Contact your local Trimble Dealer for more information about the support agreement contracts for software and firmware, and an extended warranty program for hardware.
xvi GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 19: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
About This Manual
• ftp.trimble.com – use the Trimble FTP site to send files or to receive files such as software patches, utilities, service bulletins, and FAQs. Alternatively, access the FTP site from the Trimble website at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm.
• Trimble training courses – consider a training course to help you use your GPS system to its fullest potential. For more information, visit the Trimble website at www.trimble.com/support/training.htm
Technical AssistanceIf you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the product documentation, contact your local Distributor. Alternatively, request technical support using the Trimble website at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm
Your CommentsYour feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to improve it with each revision. To forward your comments, do one of the following:
• Send an e-mail to [email protected].
• Complete the Reader Comment Form at the back of this manual and mail it according to the instructions at the bottom of the form.
If the reader comment form is not available, send comments and suggestions to the address in the front of this manual. Please mark it Attention: Technical Publications Group.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 xvii
![Page 20: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
About This Manual
Document ConventionsThe document conventions are as follows:
Convention Definition
Italics Identifies software menus, menu commands, dialog boxes, and the dialog box fields.
Helvetica Narrow Represents messages printed on the screen.
Helvetica Bold Identifies a software command button, or represents information that you must type in a software screen or window.
“Select Italics / Italics” Identifies the sequence of menus, commands, or dialog boxes that you must choose in order to reach a given screen.
[Ctrl] Is an example of a hardware function key that you must press on a personal computer (PC). If you must press more than one of these at the same time, this is represented by a plus sign, for example, [Ctrl]+[C].
xvii i GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 21: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
C H A P T E R
13
13 The Connection Manager UtilityIn this chapter:■ Introduction
■ Using the Connection Manager utility
■ The Batch Processor utility
■ Configuring the Connection Manager utility
■ Enabling the Connection Manager utility
■ The Connection Manager utility in operation
■ About the Connection Manager utility
■ Exiting the Connection Manager utility
![Page 22: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
13 The Connection Manager Utility – Introduction
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
13.1IntroductionThe Connection Manager utility is installed as part of a standard GPS Pathfinder® Office software installation. Its icon appears in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen, as shown below.
A shortcut for the Connection Manager utility is placed in \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Startup.
When the Connection Manager utility is disabled, a cross appears through its icon, as shown below.
Note – The Connection Manager utility is automatically disabled when the Data Transfer utility is running.
When GPS Pathfinder Office software is first installed the Connection Manager utility is disabled by default.
C Warning – If ASPEN and GPS Pathfinder Office software are installed on the same PC there may be a conflict between them. In this situation, Trimble recommends that you exit the Connection Manager utility software.
20 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 23: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
The Connection Manager Utility – Using the Connection Manager Utility 13
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
13.2Using the Connection Manager UtilityBefore using the Connection Manager utility it is important to set up the Batch Processor utility to do the tasks you need to do, such as differential correction and export. The Connection Manager utility uses the Batch Processor utility to perform the tasks that you select. The Batch Processor utility always uses the project specified in the selected batch setup for saving and writing files.
To use the Connection Manager utility:
• In the status bar, single-click the Connection Manager utility icon.
The Connection Manager Utility menu appears.
The menu items are described in the following sections.
Before using the Connection Manager utility, you must select an existing batch setup, or create a new batch setup, in the Batch Processor utility to do the tasks you need to do, such as differential correction and export. The Connection Manager utility uses the Batch Processor utility to perform the tasks that you select. The Batch Processor utility always uses the specified batch setup to process files.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 21
![Page 24: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
13 The Connection Manager Utility – The Batch Processor Utility
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
13.3The Batch Processor UtilityThe Batch Processor utility must be set up before enabling the Connection Manager utility. To do this:
1. To run the Batch Processor utility, click , then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office / Batch Processor.
2. From the Overview dialog, create a new setup or select a previously-used named setup. Select the tasks you want to perform and select the project to be used, and click Next to continue.
3. In the dialogs that follow, select the appropriate batch settings to specify how your data should be processed. It is important to select a base file source for differential correction, and an export setup. For more information, see The Batch Processor Utility, page 305.
4. Once you have set up the Batch Processor utility, click Close to save the setup you have selected.
Note – The Connection Manager utility always writes files to the project folder specified in the selected batch setup. The Connection Manager utility also always uses base files for differential correction from the specified project base folder. For more information, refer to Projects, page 23 in Volume 1 of this User Guide.
22 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 25: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
The Connection Manager Utility – Configuring the Connection Manager Utility 13
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
13.4Configuring the Connection Manager UtilityBefore you use the Connection Manager utility, you must configure it correctly.
To configure the Connection Manager utility:
1. In the status bar, single-click the Connection Manager utility icon.
2. From the Connection Manager utility menu, choose the Configuration command.
The Connection Manager Configuration dialog appears:
B Tip – To quickly access the Connection Manager Configuration dialog, do one of the following:
– Double-click the Connection Manager utility icon in the status bar.
– In the Utilities menu of the GPS Pathfinder Office software, select Other / Connection Manager / Connection Manager Configuration.
– Click , then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version>/ Connection Manager.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 23
![Page 26: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
13 The Connection Manager Utility – Configuring the Connection Manager Utility
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
3. In the Batch Setup group, click the drop-down arrow and select a batch setup from the list.
Note – The list will contain only those batch setups that have Data Transfer as one option.
4. Set the countdown time.
The countdown time determines how much time you have to cancel the data transfer process before it begins. The Connection Manager countdown dialog appears before the transfer process begins. Set the countdown time to a value between 0 and 120 seconds. The default is 10 seconds. If a value of 0 seconds is set, the Connection Manager countdown dialog does not appear before the data transfer process starts.
5. Click OK to confirm the settings and close the Connection Manager Configuration dialog.
The Connection Manager utility is now correctly configured and shows the device that will be monitored for data transfer. To enable the Connection Manager utility, you must select the Monitor Device option in the Connection Manager utility menu.
24 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 27: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
The Connection Manager Utility – Enabling the Connection Manager Utility 13
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
13.5Enabling the Connection Manager UtilityBefore the Connection Manager utility can be used, it must first be correctly configured and set up to monitor a device.
To enable the Connection Manager utility:
1. Click the Connection Manager utility icon in the status bar.
2. From the Connection Manager utility menu, choose Monitor Device.
The following dialog appears.
3. Click OK to confirm your intention.
4. The Connection Manager utility icon appears in the status bar (also known as the system tray) at the bottom right of the screen without a cross through its icon. This indicates that the Connection Manager utility is currently monitoring the selected device. A check mark also appears beside the Monitor Device command in the Connection Manager utility menu, as shown below.
Once it is enabled, the Connection Manager utility monitors the device and automatically runs the Batch Processor utility without any user interaction.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 25
![Page 28: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
13 The Connection Manager Utility – The Connection Manager Utility in Operation
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
13.6The Connection Manager Utility in OperationThe Connection Manager utility monitors the selected device and automatically runs the selected batch processor setup.
The following steps occur when the Connection Manager utility detects that a device has been connected:
1. When the selected device is connected to the monitored serial port, the Connection Manager utility starts the Batch Processor utility.
2. The Batch Processor utility first starts the Data Transfer utility
3. The Data Transfer utility connects to the device and determines whether there are data files to transfer from the device to the office computer.
Note – If the connected data collector is a GeoExplorer 3, only new and updated data files are selected for transfer.
If no files are found for transferring, then the process ends immediately and the Batch Processor log is displayed with the message No files found to transfer.
If data files are found, the following dialog appears, showing the countdown time.
4. If you do not want to transfer files, click Cancel to exit this dialog.
Click Cancel only if you want to terminate the transfer process. For more information on file transfer, see Chapter 15, The Data Transfer Utility.
26 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 29: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
The Connection Manager Utility – The Connection Manager Utility in Operation 13
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
5. If no action is taken, the countdown period elapses and the Receiving dialog appears, followed by the Converting dialog.
6. The transferred files are processed according to the selected batch setup.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 27
![Page 30: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
13 The Connection Manager Utility – About the Connection Manager Utility
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
13.7About the Connection Manager UtilityInformation about the Connection Manager utility, including its version number, is available from the Connection Manager utility menu.
To display details about the Connection Manager utility:
1. Click the Connection Manager utility icon in the status bar.
2. Select About the Connection Manager in the Connection Manager utility menu.
This information may be required when requesting technical assistance.
28 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 31: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
The Connection Manager Utility – Exiting the Connection Manager Utility 13
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
13.8Exiting the Connection Manager UtilityYou do not need to exit the Connection Manager utility between batch processing sessions. Exit the Connection Manager utility only when you never want to monitor a device.
To exit the Connection Manager utility:
1. In the status bar, click the Connection Manager utility icon.
2. From the Connection Manager utility menu, select Exit the Connection Manager.
3. The Connection Manager utility closes and its icon disappears from the status bar.
You need to start the Connection Manager utility again if you want to monitor a device connected to a serial port.
To start the Connection Manager utility:
1. In the Utilities menu of the GPS Pathfinder Office software, select Other / Connection Manager.
2. The Connection Manager utility opens, its icon appears in the status bar, and the Connection Manager Configuration dialog appears.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 29
![Page 32: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
13 The Connection Manager Utility – Exiting the Connection Manager Utility
Con
nect
ion
Man
ager
30 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 33: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
C H A P T E R
14
14 The Configuration Manager Utility■ Introduction
■ Starting the Configuration Manager utility
■ File menu
■ Edit menu
■ View menu
■ Window menu
■ Help menu
![Page 34: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Introduction
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.1IntroductionThe Configuration Manager utility is one of a series of GPS Pathfinder Office utilities for managing data collection projects. The Configuration Manager utility provides all the functionality you need to create a configuration file that can be sent to a GeoExplorer 3 data collector. A configuration file contains instructions that define, and optionally lock, the configuration of the GeoExplorer 3 data collector. The configuration of GeoExplorer 3 data collector determines how data is collected, entered, displayed, and communicated with external devices. The Configuration Manager utility provides supervisors with extensive control over data collection operations carried out in the field using a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
The following sections describe the user interface and menu commands, and provide details on how the Configuration Manager software works.
32 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 35: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – Starting the Configuration Manager Utility 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.2Starting the Configuration Manager UtilityBefore you can start the Configuration Manager utility, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the Configuration Manager utility from within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Configuration Manager utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Other / Configuration Manager from the menu bar.
To start the Configuration Manager utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Configuration Manager.
When you first start the Configuration Manager utility, the main window appears:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 33
![Page 36: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Starting the Configuration Manager Utility
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
The menu bar provides access to all of the functionality of the Configuration Manager utility. (The menus displayed in the menu bar differ depending on whether or not a configuration file is open.) A toolbar contains tools for frequently used commands. The status bar at the bottom of the window displays a tip or instruction for to the selected command.
34 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 37: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.3File MenuThe File menu groups together commands for managing files. Each command is described in the following sections.
14.3.1 New
Select File / New (or click the New tool on the toolbar) to create a new configuration file. The Configuration dialog appears:
This dialog lets you name the configuration file, provides access to password settings, and access to the eight settings tabs.
Configuration name Enter a name for the configuration file.
Password Settings Click this button to open the Password Settings dialog.
Tabs
Click the tabs to display the configuration settings and their associated values. When a new configuration file is created, fields are set to predefined default values.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 35
![Page 38: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Select an item in a list to change its value. Controls appear in the group box to the right of the list. Use these controls to change the value of the selected item, and also optionally lock the value to prevent users changing the value in the field.
The tabs on the Configuration dialog are described in the following sections.
Data Tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect how data is collected on a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
Click the Data tab to display a list of data controls and their associated values:
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock the value of the selected item.
36 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 39: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Table 14.1 describes the Data tab fields.
Table 14.1 Data tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
Log between features
Three-option entry field for the logging rate which can be either a time (seconds or minutes), a distance (meters or feet), or Off. Use the Time or Distance options to specify the rate at which GPS positions are logged when no feature is being logged. This provides a trail that shows where the user has travelled during a data collection session. Use Off to disable this feature.
Off
Log PPRT data Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these settings to specify whether or not PPRT data is logged. If users want to postprocess real-time data using the Differential Correction utility, they must log PPRT data. This information is used to prepare the real-time data for postprocessing back in the office.
No
Log velocities Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these settings to specify whether or not velocity records are logged.
No
Antenna height Numeric entry field that accepts values up to two decimal places. If you enter a valuable with alternative units (for example, feet), the Configuration Manager converts the value to meters. Use this field to specify the height that the antenna will be for data collection. The antenna height is the height of the GPS antenna above the feature being collected.
1.00 meter
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 37
![Page 40: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Allow GPS update
Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these settings to specify whether or not positional data can be updated (replaced). The entries in the pop-up list are:Yes – When you are updating a feature you can log new GPS positions. This new data replaces the positional information stored for the feature.No – When you are updating a feature you cannot update (replace) the position information stored for that feature. You can update attributes, but not the position.
Yes
Warning distance
Three-option entry field where the Distance option has a value in meters. Use these settings to specify the distance to a previously mapped feature within which the user will need to be, before they are allowed to update that feature.Specify the warning distance between the original feature and your current position. If this distance is exceeded, a warning appears. For example, a warning distance of 5 m means that you are warned if you try to log GPS positions for a feature that is more than 5 meters away from the previously collected position.
NOTE: When you are not using real-time, positions are accurate to within 100 m. A warning distance of less than 100 m is not accurate unless you are using RTCM in the field.
Always warn
Filename prefix Text entry field. Use this field to specify the first letter of the file name when the file name is automatically generated by the GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
R
Table 14.1 Data tab fields (Continued)
Field Field type and its purpose Default
38 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 41: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
GPS Tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect the precision or quality required for the GPS positions. GPS settings are a critical parameter for data collection and it is important to configure the GeoExplorer 3 data collector to best suit the working environment.
Click the GPS tab to display its list of GPS controls and their associated values:
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock the value of the selected item.
Table 14.2 describes the GPS tab fields.
Table 14.2 GPS tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
GPS settings mode
Drop-down list field with two options (Slider mode and Custom mode). Use these settings to specify whether the GPS settings are defined in terms of a slider (that changes a number of GPS settings together) or in terms of individual custom GPS setting.
Slider mode
Standard settings
GPS precision Slider with nine levels from High (more accurate) to Low (less accurate). Use these settings to specify the GPS settings using a slider that changes a number of settings together. The slider setting indicates the relative precision required for the GPS positions collected in the field.
Medium
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 39
![Page 42: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Custom settings
PDOP Mask Numeric entry field. Use this field to specify the PDOP value above which the GeoExplorer 3 handheld will cease to log and use GPS positions.
6.0
SNR Mask Numeric entry field. Use this field to specify the SNR value below which the GeoExplorer 3 handheld will cease to use a satellite to compute positions.
4.0
Elevation Mask Numeric entry field. Use this field to specify the minimum elevation above the horizon above which satellites will be used to compute a GPS position.
15°
Minimum Satellites
Drop-down list with three options (3, 4 or 5). Use these settings to specify the minimum number of satellites that will be used to compute a GPS position.
5
2D Altitude Two-option entry field where the Value option has a value in meters. Use this field to specify how the GeoExplorer 3 handheld will computer altitude values when operating in 2D mode. This field is available only if the user selects ‘3’ in the Minimum satellites field.
Use last 3D GPS
Table 14.2 GPS tab fields (Continued)
Field Field type and its purpose Default
40 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 43: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Real-time tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect the collection of data using RTCM.
Click the Real-time tab to display a list of real-time controls and their associated values:
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock the value of the selected item.
Table 14.3 describes the Real-time tab fields.
Table 14.3 Real-time tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
Mode Drop-down list field with two options: RTCM only (only GPS positions that have been corrected in real-time are recorded) and Best available (most accurate positions are recorded). Use these settings to specify the mode of operation of the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
Best available
RTCM Age Limit
Drop-down list field with five options: 5, 10, 20, 50, and 100 seconds. Use these settings to specify the age at which the RTCM message is considered to be too old to be useful in providing differential corrections.
20s
Station ID Two-option entry field where the Value option has a numeric value. Use this field to specify the RTCM Station ID that should be used to receive real-time corrections. This field is active when Source is set to Other.
Any
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 41
![Page 44: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Coordinates tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect how data is collected and displayed.
Click the Coordinates tab to display a list of coordinate controls and their associated values:
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock the value of the selected item.
Table 14.4 describes the Coordinates tab fields.
Table 14.4 Coordinates tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
System Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use this button to specify the system that will be used for entering and displaying coordinates.
Latitude/ Longitude
Zone Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use this button to specify the zone that will be used for calculating coordinates. The Zone field is not active if System is set to Latitude/ Longitude.
N/A
Datum Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use this button to specify the datum that will be used for calculating coordinates.
WGS 1984
Altitude reference
Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use this button to specify the altitude reference that will be used for entering and displaying altitude values.
MSL
42 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 45: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Units tab Use this tab to configure parameters that affect how units of measure are entered and displayed.
Click the Units tab to display a list of unit controls and their associated values:
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that appear in the group box at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock the value of the selected item.
Geoid Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use this button to specify the geoid model that will be used for calculating coordinates. This field is available only when the selected Altitude reference is set to MSL.
DMA 10x10 (Global)
Coordinate units
Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use this button to specify the units that will be used for entering and displaying coordinates.
Meters
Altitude units Button (displays the Coordinate System Selection dialog). Use this button to specify the units that will be used for entering and displaying altitude values.
Meters
Table 14.4 Coordinates tab fields (Continued)
Field Field type and its purpose Default
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 43
![Page 46: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Table 14.5 describes the Units tab fields.
Table 14.5 Units tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
Distance Drop-down list field with five options: Meters (m), Feet (ft), Kilometers (km), Miles (mi) and Nautical miles (nm). Use these settings to specify the units that will be used to display distances on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
Meters
Area Drop-down list field with six options: Square meters (m2), Square feet (ft2), Hectares (Ha), Acres (A), Square kilometers (km2), and Square miles (mi2). Use these settings to specify the units that will be used to display areas on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
Square meters
Velocity Drop-down list field with five options: Meters/Second (m/s), Feet/Seconds (ft/s), Km/Hour (kph), Miles/Hour (mph), and Knots (kt). Use these settings to specify the units that will be used to display velocities on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
Km/Hour
Angle Drop-down list field with four options: Degrees (°), Gradians (gon), Rhumbs (rh), and Mils (mil). Use these settings to specify the units that will be used to enter and display angles on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
Degrees
North reference Drop-down list field with two options: True and Magnetic. Use these settings to specify the north reference that will be used to calculate bearings.
True
Declination Two-option entry field where the Value option has a numeric value. Use these settings to specify the magnetic declination that should be used when calculating bearings.
Auto
44 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 47: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Formats tab Use this tab to configure the parameters that affect the formats used to enter and display data.
Click the Formats tab to display a list of format controls and their associated values:
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock the value of the selected item.
Table 14.6 describes the Formats tab fields.
Table 14.6 Formats tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
Language Drop-down list field with six options: Deutsch, English, Español, Français, Portugues, and Russian. Use these settings to specify the language used to run the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.
English
Offset Drop-down list field with two options: Horz/Vert (horizontal and vertical distance) and Slope/Incl (slope distance and inclination). Use these settings to specify the format for entering and displaying offsets.
Horz/Vert
Degrees Drop-down list field with three options: DD°MM’SS.ss", DD°MM.mmm', and DD.ddd°. Use these settings to specify the format for entering and displaying angles and latitude and longitude coordinates.
DD°MM’SS.ss"
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 45
![Page 48: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
COMMS tab Use this tab to set up the parameters for communication with external devices. Set these parameters to transfer data to and from a computer, or to communicate with radios to receive real-time corrections.
Click the COMMS tab to display a list of communication controls and their associated values:
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that appear in the In group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock the value of the selected item.
Date Drop-down list field with three options: DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, and YYYY/MM/DD. Use these settings to specify the date format for entry and display purposes.
MM/DD/YYYY
Time Drop-down list field with two options: 12 Hour and 24 Hour. Use these settings to specify the time format for entry and display purposes.
12 Hour
Time zone Numeric entry field. Enter number of hours and minutes (either negative or positive). Use this field to specify the offset from UTC in hours and minutes.
+ 00h 00m
Coordinate order
Drop-down list field with two options: Lat/Long and Long/Lat. Use these settings to specify the coordinate order for entry and display purposes.
Lat/Long
Table 14.6 Formats tab fields (Continued)
Field Field type and its purpose Default
46 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 49: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Table 14.7 describes the COMMS tab fields.
Table 14.7 COMMS tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
Data transfer Drop-down list field with three options (Support module, Serial clip, Off). Use this settings to specify how the GeoExplorer 3 will communicate with GPS Pathfinder Office.
Support module
RTCM input Drop-down list field with four options (Support module, Serial clip, Cable-free BoB, Off). Use these settings to specify what real-time device the GeoExplorer 3 is configured to receive signals from.
Wireless BoB
NMEA output Drop-down list field with three options (Support module, Serial clip, Off). Use these settings to specify whether the GeoExplorer 3 handheld generates NMEA output.
Off
Port settings
Input baud rate Drop-down list field with nine options between 110 and 38400. Use these settings to specify the baud rate for data input (that is, RTCM).
2400
Output baud rate
Drop-down list field with nine options between 110 and 38400. Use these settings to specify the baud rate for data output (that is, NMEA).
2400
Data bits Drop-down list field with two options (7 and 8). Use these settings to specify the number of bits in a byte (usually 8). Each byte is a single piece of information, such as a character or a number.
8
Stop bits Drop-down list field with two options (1 and 2). Use these settings to specify the number of stop bits at the end of a byte (usually 1).
1
Parity Drop-down list field with three options (None, Even, and Odd). Use these settings to specify the parity of a byte. The parity of a digital message comprising of 0s and 1s is the binary sum over the length of the byte. A parity error results when one of the bits in a byte is changed.
None
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 47
![Page 50: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
Other tab Use this tab to set the parameters for the beep volume, and configure the GeoExplorer 3 data collector to output NMEA messages.
Click the Other tab to display a list of other controls and their associated values:
Select an entry in the Item list to change its value. Use the controls that appear in the group at the right of the dialog to set and optionally lock the value of the selected item.
Table 14.8 describes the Other tab fields.
Table 14.8 Other tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
Beep Volume Drop-down list field with two options (On and Off). Use these settings to specify whether the GeoExplorer 3 handheld beeps when logging data.
On
NMEA output interval
Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these settings to specify whether the GeoExplorer 3 handheld generates NMEA output.
5s
48 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 51: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.3.2 Open
Select File / Open (or click the Open tool on the toolbar) to open an existing configuration file. The Open dialog appears:
Select the file you want to open to view and/or edit. Click Open to open the file or Cancel to abandon the action.
NMEA Messages
GGA Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these settings to specify whether or not the GGA messages should be included in the output. This field is active only when NMEA output is set to Yes.
Yes
VTG Drop-down list field with two options (Yes and No). Use these settings to specify whether or not the VTG messages should be included in the output. This field is active only when NMEA output is set to Yes.
Yes
Table 14.8 Other tab fields
Field Field type and its purpose Default
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 49
![Page 52: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.3.3 Close
Select File / Close to close the current configuration file. If there are unsaved changes in the current configuration file a warning dialog appears:
Click Yes to save changes and close the file, No to close the file without saving the changes, or Cancel to dismiss the warning dialog and return to the configuration file.
14.3.4 Save
Select File / Save (or click the Save tool on the toolbar) to save the current configuration file.
You can save as many times as you like while editing the current configuration file.
If the file has not been given a name, the following warning message appears:
Click OK to dismiss the message and enter a name in the Configuration name field.
If the file has not been saved previously, the Save As dialog appears.
50 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 53: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.3.5 Save As
Select File / Save As to save a copy of the current configuration file with a different name. The following dialog appears:
Use the Save As dialog to enter a name for the configuration file, and to determine the drive and folder to which the file will be saved. The default location for saving the file is the current GPS Pathfinder Office project. Click Save to complete the action. By default, the file has a .ccf (Common Configuration file) extension.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 51
![Page 54: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.3.6 Password Settings Dialog
Select View / Password Settings, or click the Password Settings button in the Configuration dialog, to set up task locking for a GeoExplorer 3 data collector. The following dialog appears:
Use this dialog to edit the task locks that are sent to the GeoExplorer 3 data collector when the configuration file is transferred.
Password Use this field to enter a password for the configuration file. A password consists of between four and eight alphanumeric characters. This password is used on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector to unlock tasks and configuration items.
Locked Tasks Use this field to optionally lock settings. The settings are:
• Data files Locking data file deletion prevents the user from deleting any data files on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
52 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 55: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
• Data dictionary files Locking data dictionary file setup prevents the user from editing any data dictionary files on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
Locking data dictionary selection prevents the user from selecting a different data dictionary for use on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector. The data dictionary most recently sent to, or used by, the GeoExplorer 3 data collector will be used.
• Feature settings Locking feature setup prevents the user from editing any feature settings in any data dictionary on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
• Waypoints Locking waypoint deletion prevents the user from deleting any waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
Locking waypoint editing prevents the user from editing any existing waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 data collector. New waypoints can still be created.
• Reset to factory settings Locking the ability to reset the GeoExplorer 3 data collector to the factory settings prevents the user from resetting the GeoExplorer 3 data collector to the state it was when first purchased. If the GeoExplorer 3 data collector is reset to factory settings any changes that have been made to the setup of the GeoExplorer 3 data collector will be lost.
• Reset Receiver Locking reset receiver prevents the user from restarting the GeoExplorer 3 GPS receiver. If the receiver is reset, the current almanac data will be deleted and the GeoExplorer 3 data collector will take several minutes to re-acquire satellites and generate positions.
• Reset Upgrade mode Locking upgrade mode prevents the user from transferring new GeoExplorer 3 software to the GeoExplorer 3 data collector. When transferring new software all data files and settings on the data collector are lost.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 53
![Page 56: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.3.7 Use GPS Pathfinder Office Settings
Select File / Use GPS Pathfinder Office Settings to set the Configuration Manager utility to use the current GPS Pathfinder Office settings as its default settings. This applies to the settings on the Units, Coordinates, and Formats tab. When the Use GPS Pathfinder Office Settings is selected, a checkmark appears beside the command in the File menu. If a checkmark is present, the settings in a new configuration file will always reflect the current GPS Pathfinder Office setup.
14.3.8 Print Setup
Select File / Print Setup to set up a printer. This generally involves selecting paper size and orientation, but different printers have different options. Use this command only when you want to print to a printer other that the one currently setup in their Windows environment.
14.3.9 Set Printer Font
Select File / Set Printer Font to select the printer font for printing the configuration file. The standard Font dialog appears, allowing you to select the font name, type, and size to be used. A sample of the font is displayed.
14.3.10 Print Preview
Select File / Print Preview to see a preview of the printed pages before printing. This is useful for checking that the page layout and font are correct before actually sending it to the printer.
54 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 57: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – File Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.3.11 Print
Select File / Print (or click the Print tool on the toolbar) to send the current configuration file to the printer. The dialog that appears depends on the selected printer.
14.3.12 List of Files
Select File / FileName.ccf to open a recently opened configuration file.
14.3.13 Exit
Select File / Exit to close the Configuration Manager utility. You are prompted to save any unsaved configuration files.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 55
![Page 58: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Edit menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.4Edit menuThe Edit menu groups together commands for editing fields in the configuration files. Each command is described in the following sections.
14.4.1 Copy Group
Select Edit / Copy Group (or click the Copy Group tool on the toolbar) to copy the selected group.
14.4.2 Paste Group
Select Edit / Paste Group (or click the Paste Group tool on the toolbar) to paste the previously copied group.
14.4.3 Lock Group
Select Edit / Lock Group (or click the Lock Group tool on the toolbar) to password-lock all of the settings on the current page of the current configuration file. This command checks the Password locked check box for all of the settings on the current page.
14.4.4 Unlock Group
Select Edit / Unlock Group (or click the Unlock Group tool on the toolbar) to unlock all of the settings that are password locked on the current page of the current configuration file. This command clears the Password locked check box for all of the settings on the current page.
56 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 59: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – View Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.5View MenuThe View menu groups together commands for configuring the Configuration Manager utility window. Each command is described in the following sections.
14.5.1 Toolbar
Select View / Toolbar to display or hide the toolbar.
By default the toolbar is displayed. Select this menu option to hide the toolbar and remove the tick beside the Toolbar menu command.
14.5.2 Status Bar
Select View / Status Bar to display or hide the status bar.
By default, the status bar is displayed. Select this menu option to hide the status bar and remove the tick beside the Status Bar menu command.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 57
![Page 60: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Window Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.6Window MenuThe Window menu groups together commands for managing the display of configuration files in the Configuration Manager utility window. Each command is described in the following sections.
14.6.1 Cascade
Select Window / Cascade to arrange all open configuration files in a cascading fashion.
14.6.2 Tile
Select Window / Tile to arrange all open configuration files in a tiled fashion.
14.6.3 Arrange Icons
Select Window / Arrange Icons to arrange all minimized open configuration files icons in a orderly fashion across the bottom of the Configuration Manager utility window.
14.6.4 List of Configuration Files
Select Window / FileName.ccf to make an open file active (that is, bring it to the front for viewing and editing).
58 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 61: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
The Configuration Manager Utility – Help Menu 14
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
14.7Help MenuThe Help menu groups together commands for viewing information about the Configuration Manager utility. Each command is described in the following sections.
14.7.1 Help Topics
Select Help / Help Topics to display the Configuration Manager online help.
B Tip – Pressing [F1] while the focus is on an object takes you to the online help showing information regarding that object.
14.7.2 About Configuration Manager
Select Help / About Configuration Manager (or click the About tool on the toolbar) to display the About Configuration Manager
dialog. This dialog provides important information about the Configuration Manager version number and copyright.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 59
![Page 62: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
14 The Configuration Manager Utility – Help Menu
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
er
60 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 63: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
C H A P T E R
15
15 The Data Transfer UtilityIn this chapter:
■ Introduction
■ Overview
■ Add Device wizard
Related chapters:
■ Chapter 16, Data Collectors
■ Chapter 17, Software
■ Chapter 18, GIS Devices and E-mail
■ Chapter 19, GPS Receivers
■ Chapter 20, Types of Files
■ Chapter 21, Troubleshooting
![Page 64: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Introduction
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
15.1IntroductionThe Data Transfer utility is produced by Trimble Navigation Limited for transferring data between a variety of data collection devices and an office computer. It runs under Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, or 2000.
The Data Transfer utility can run in two modes: standalone mode and component mode.
The Data Transfer Help contains topics to help you transfer data in both modes. The Help system uses icons to help you identify information that relates only to one mode:
This icon appears when information is relevant only to transferring data in standalone mode.
This icon appears when information is relevant only to transferring data in component mode.
The Help system covers all aspects of the Data Transfer utility. You will usually only have either the Trimble Geomatics Office software or the GPS Pathfinder Office software installed on your computer, not both, so some information in this help system will not be relevant to you. The Data Transfer Help uses icons to help you identify such information:
This icon appears when information is relevant only to a Trimble GIS and Mapping product, such as:
• the GeoExplorer 3 data collector
• a file type that can only be transferred to or from a GIS device
The Help system assumes a basic familiarity with the devices that you will be using, and an understanding of the different file types you can transfer.
62 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 65: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
15.2OverviewThe Data Transfer utility uses a device definition to store information about each individual piece of equipment (called a device) you connect to it. The first task when transferring files to or from a device is to create a device definition for it with the Add Device wizard. For more information, see page 93.
Once a device definition exists for a device, you can use the Data Transfer utility to transfer files to or from it whenever it is connected to your office computer.
The Data Transfer utility is part of the Trimble Geomatics Office software and the GPS Pathfinder Office software. The software you run the Data Transfer utility from affects the types of devices it can connect to, the file types you can transfer, and the way the Data Transfer utility works.
15.2.1 Standalone Mode
The Data Transfer utility can run in two modes: standalone mode and component mode. When you run the Data Transfer utility in standalone mode, you transfer files using the Data Transfer utility only. You use dialogs and functions within the Data Transfer utility to:
• select files
• prepare data for transfer
• communicate with devices
• transfer files
With the Data Transfer utility you can transfer files to and from survey GPS receivers, GIS devices, such as a GeoExplorer 3 data collector, and survey devices, such as a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software, or a GPS receiver.
When you run the Data Transfer utility as a standalone utility, you can transfer files into any location on your computer, not just a project folder.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 63
![Page 66: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Although the standalone Data Transfer utility does not require you to transfer files to or from a project, the default transfer location for GIS files is the currently selected GPS Pathfinder Office project.
The Data Transfer utility runs in standalone mode whenever you start it from:
• the GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities menu
• the GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities toolbar
• a shortcut
This icon indicates help that applies to the standalone Data Transfer utility.
• Transferring from a GIS device
• Transferring to a GIS device
Open dialog (transferring files to a survey receiver with the standalone Data Transfer utility)
Use the Open dialog to select files to transfer to a survey receiver, and to specify the file format you want to convert files into.
To display the Open dialog, select the Send tab in the Data Transfer dialog, then click Add�
The controls you can see and use in the Open dialog depend on the type of file you have chosen to send and the type of device you are sending files to. The Open dialog contains the following:
Option Description
Look in This field shows the name of the current folder. Double-click on folders or use the Up tool to move around in the folder hierarchy.
Up Select this tool to move to the previous level of the folder hierarchy.
New Select this tool to add a new folder in the current folder.
64 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 67: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
15.2.2 Component Mode
The Data Transfer utility can run in two modes: component mode and standalone mode. When you run the Data Transfer utility as a component of the GPS Pathfinder Office software, the Data Transfer utility connects to devices and transfers files, but you use the dialogs and commands of the office software to:
• select files to send or receive
• specify the file type you want to send or receive
• select a destination on your computer to transfer files into
• prepare data for transfer to a data collector.
List Select this tool to show only the icons and names of files in the current folder.
Details Select this tool to show full file details of files in the current folder.
List of files The folders and files matching the selected file type appear in this list. Select a file to add it to the File name field.
File name The names of the files you have selected appear in this field.
Files of type This list shows the file types you can send to this device. The only option for a survey receiver is Station/Session tables.
Destination Shows the name of the device you are sending files to.
File format Select a format from this list, if it is available, to convert files into that format before they are sent to the device.
Select When you have selected the files you want to send to the survey receiver, click Select to close this dialog and return to the Data Transfer dialog. The selected files appear in the Files to Send list.
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 65
![Page 68: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
For example, to transfer files from a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software, you can use the Import dialog in the Trimble Geomatics Office software to select the type of file you want to transfer, then open the Data Transfer utility's Open dialog for the actual transfer of files. This is an example of running the Data Transfer utility as a component of another application (in this case, the Trimble Geomatics Office software). The files are transferred into the current project in the Trimble Geomatics Office software.
This icon indicates Help that applies to running the Data Transfer utility as a component.
Running the Data Transfer utility as a component of the GPS Pathfinder Office software
The GPS Pathfinder Office software is designed for processing GPS data collected in the field.
Usually, when you run the Data Transfer utility from within the GPS Pathfinder Office software, it runs in standalone mode. Although you start the Data Transfer utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities menu or the toolbar, the Data Transfer utility behaves as if you had run it from a shortcut, and does not interact with any other part of the GPS Pathfinder Office software.
When you use the Batch Processor utility, you run the Data Transfer utility as a component of the GPS Pathfinder Office software. A batch setup may include:
• a device definition from those you have set up in the Data Transfer utility
• a correction setup from the Differential Correction utility
• an export setup from the Export utility.
66 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 69: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
You use the Batch Processor utility, not the Data Transfer utility, to select the device definition. When you run the batch setup, the Data Transfer utility connects to the selected device. If you specified manual selection of files, the Data Transfer Open dialog appears, and you can select any data files from the device. If you chose to transfer all files, or new files only, the Open dialog does not appear, and the Data Transfer utility transfers the files automatically.
15.2.3 Devices
A device is a piece of equipment that you store GPS, mapping, or surveying data on. Some examples of devices are:
• GPS receivers
• data collectors which store feature and attribute information with GPS positions
• PC cards, which can be inserted into data collectors to provide extra storage space
Before the Data Transfer utility can connect to a device, you must use the Add Device wizard to create a device definition. For more information, see page 108. The wizard stores information about the device including its type, connection, and communication details.
When the device is disconnected from the PC, its definition in the Data Transfer utility still remains. When the device is reconnected, you can start communication with the equipment by selecting the device's definition in the Data Transfer utility.
The Data Transfer utility lets you define
• GPS receiver devices
• five types of GIS device
• four types of survey device
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 67
![Page 70: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Types of Devices
To connect to a device with the GPS Pathfinder Office software, you must create a device definition using the correct device type, as shown in the list below.
For information about each device, the file types you can transfer to or from it, and its connection details, click on its name or icon.
Table 15.1 Types of Devices
If you want to connect to a ... select this device type ...
GeoExplorer 3 GIS datalogger
GeoExplorer II GIS datalogger
GeoExplorer GIS datalogger
CE device running the TerraSync software GIS datalogger on Windows CE
TSC1 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
TDC1 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
TDC2 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
MC-V running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
PC card from a GIS data collector GIS PC card
Folder on your computer or network GIS folder
E-mail account E-mail device
Field computer running the ASPEN software GIS datalogger
68 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 71: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Transferring files from a GIS device
Note – Before you transfer files from the device, connect it to your computer and prepare it for transfer.
The tasks required depend on the type of device.
To transfer files from a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office / Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
Pathfinder Basic GIS datalogger
4600LS receiver GPS receiver
4700 receiver GPS receiver
4800 receiver GPS receiver
Series 4000 receiver GPS receiver
7400 receiver GPS receiver
Table 15.1 Types of Devices (Continued)
If you want to connect to a ... select this device type ...
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 69
![Page 72: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
The Device list contains the devices defined in the Data Transfer utility. If the device you want to connect to is not listed, click Devices then New in the Devices dialog to run the Add Device wizard.
2. Select the Receive tab.
3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files from.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where <device> represents the type of device, such as GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
4. Click Add and select the type of file you want to transfer from the list that appears. The files you can transfer depend on the type of device connected.
The Open dialog appears. Its appearance depends on the type of file you selected for transfer. The Look in field shows the device name, and the list shows the files of the specified type that are stored on the device.
5. Select the files you want to transfer.
6. In the Destination field, type the folder on your computer or network you want to copy the files to.
Alternatively, click Browse to display the Browse for Folder dialog, select a folder, and click OK to copy the selected folder and its path to the Destination dialog.
70 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 73: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
B Tip – The default destination folder is the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder. You can change the default folder by changing the selected project in the GPS Pathfinder Office software or with the Project Changer utility.
7. Click Open.
The Open dialog closes and you are returned to the Data Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to Receive list.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to select more files for transfer. They do not have to be the same file type as you have already selected.
9. Click Transfer All.
The Receiving dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring of the selected files. When all files have been transferred, the Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device's file format.
Note – Version 1.20 of the TerraSync software supports data files that include Filename attributes. A Filename attribute lets you specify a file, such as a sound or image file, to attach to the feature. The value of the attribute is the path to and filename of the attached file. If any data file that you transfer has files attached to it, these attached files are transferred with the data file and are stored in a subfolder of the destination folder. The name of this subfolder is the data file's name with the extension ".files". For example, if the data file is Seaview.ssf, its attached files are stored in the folder Seaview.files, directly under the folder that you transferred Seaview.ssf to.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
10. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click No to close the message box.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 71
![Page 74: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Transferring files from a survey receiver
Note – Before you transfer files from any device, you should connect it to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend on the type of device.
To transfer files from a survey device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. Select the Receive tab.
The Device list contains all the devices defined in the Data Transfer utility. If necessary, you can click Devices then New in the Devices dialog to run the Add Device wizard and add a device to the list.
3. From the Device list, select the device that you want to transfer files from.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where <device> represents the type of device, such as a 4800 receiver.
4. Click Add.
The Open dialog appears. The Look in list shows the device name, and the list shows the files that are stored on the device.
72 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 75: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
5. From the Files of Type list, select the file type that you want to transfer from the selected device. The list of files available depends on the type of device selected.
6. Select the files you want to transfer.
7. If necessary, select an option from the File format list to convert files into this format when they are received from the device.
8. The Destination field defaults to the last location you transferred files from this device into. In the Destination field, type the folder on your computer or network you want to copy the files to.
Alternatively, click Browse to display the Browse for Folder dialog, select a folder, and click OK to copy the selected folder and its path to the Destination dialog.
9. Click Open.
The Open dialog closes and you are returned to the Data Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to Receive list.
10. Repeat steps 4 through 9 to select more files for transfer. They do not have to be the same file type as you have already selected.
11. Click Transfer All.
The Receiving dialog appears, showing the progress of the transfer of the selected files. When all files have been received, the Converting dialog appears as the files are converted to the required file format.
A message appears to warn of any problems or errors that occurred.
12. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click No to close the message dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 73
![Page 76: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Transferring files to a GIS device
Note – Before you transfer files to any device, you should connect it to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend on the type of device.
To transfer files to a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office / Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
The Device list contains all the devices defined in the Data Transfer utility. If the device you want to connect to is not listed, click Devices then New in the Devices dialog to run the Add Device wizard.
2. Select the Send tab.
3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files to.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where <device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
74 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 77: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
4. Click Add and select the type of file you want to transfer from the list that appears. The files you can transfer depend on the type of device connected.
The Open dialog appears. The Look in list shows the last folder you selected files from for this device, the Files of Type list shows the files type you selected, and the main list shows the folders and files of that type in that folder.
B Tip – The default folder is the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder. You can change the default folder by changing the selected project in the GPS Pathfinder Office software or with the Project Changer utility.
5. From the main list, select the files you want to transfer.
6. If necessary, select an option from the Destination group to copy files to the main memory of the data collector or to a PC card installed on the data collector.
7. Click Open.
The Open dialog closes and you are returned to the Data Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to Send list.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to select more files for transfer. You can add different file types to this list.
9. Click Transfer All.
The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring of the selected files.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 75
![Page 78: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Note – Version 1.20 of the TerraSync software supports data files that include Filename attributes. A Filename attribute lets you specify a file, such as a sound or image file, to attach to the feature. The value of the attribute is the path to and filename of the attached file. If any data file that you transfer has files attached to it, these attached files are transferred with the data file and are stored on the CE device under the TerraSync data folder.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
10. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click No to close the message box.
Transferring files to a survey receiver
Note – Before you transfer files to any device, you should connect it to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend on the type of device.
To transfer files to a survey device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
– In the Trimble Geomatics Office software:
Close any open project, then select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Close any open project, then click the Data Transfer shortcut in the Utilities group of the project bar.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
76 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 79: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
2. The Device list contains all the devices defined in Data Transfer. If necessary, you can click Devices then New in the Devices dialog to run the Add Device wizard and add a device to the list.
3. From the Device list, select the device that you want to transfer files to.
Data Transfer tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where <device> represents the type of device, such as a 4800 receiver.
4. Click Add.
The Open dialog appears. The Look in list shows the last folder you selected files from for this device, and the main list shows the folders and files in that folder.
5. From the Files of Type list, select the file type that you want to send to the selected device. The list of files available depends on the type of device selected.
6. If necessary, use the Look in list and the list box to change the selected drive and folder.
7. From the main list, select the files you want to transfer.
8. If necessary, select an option from the File format list to convert files into this format when they are sent to the device.
9. Click Select.
The Open dialog closes and you are returned to the Data Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to Send list.
10. Repeat steps 4 through 9 to select more files for transfer. They do not have to be the same file type as you have already selected.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 77
![Page 80: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
11. Click Transfer All.
The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transfer of the selected files.
A message appears to warn of any problems or errors that occurred.
12. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click No to close the message dialog.
Transferring background files to a GIS device
Note – Before you transfer files to any device, you should connect it to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend on the type of device.
Note – In order to use a bitmap (raster) file as a background file, it must be georeferenced to its location on the earth. Some GIS programs and utilities can georeference bitmap files. A georeferenced bitmap file has a world (.wld) file of the same name. Data Transfer can only transfer a raster file as a background if there is a corresponding world file in the same folder.
To transfer background files to a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office / Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
78 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 81: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
2. Select the Send tab.
3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files to.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where <device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
4. Click Add and select Background from the list that appears.
The Load Background Files dialog appears.
The list shows all the background files you have identified in the GPS Pathfinder Office software or the Data Transfer utility. If a file in the list cannot be sent to the selected device, it is shown as unavailable.
5. If the background file you want is not in the list, click Add. The Add Background Files dialog appears.
Browse for the file you want to add, highlight it and click Open.
The Add Background Files dialog closes. The file you selected is added to the list in the Load Background Files dialog.
6. Select the check box beside each background file you want to transfer. Clear the check box beside any file you do not want to transfer.
7. Click OK.
The Load Background Files dialog closes and you are returned to the Data Transfer dialog. The background files you selected are added to the Files to Send list.
8. Click Transfer All.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 79
![Page 82: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring of the selected files.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
9. Click Yes to view the message log in Notepad. Click No to close the message box.
Transferring a coordinate system to a GIS device
Note – Before you transfer files to any device, you should connect it to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend on the type of device.
C Warning – The TerraSync software only uses the last coordinate system or coordinate system file you transferred. To make more than one coordinate system available on a CE device running the TerraSync software, you must use the Coordinate System Manager utility to create a .cse file containing all the coordinate systems and sites you require, and then transfer it as a Coordinate System Export file.
To transfer a coordinate system to a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office / Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. Select the Send tab.
80 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 83: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files to.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where <device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
4. Click Add and select Coordinate System from the list that appears.
The Coordinate System dialog appears.
5. Select the site, coordinate system, zone, datum, and geoid you want to transfer.
6. Click OK.
The Coordinate System dialog closes and you are returned to the Data Transfer dialog. The coordinate system you selected are added to the Files to Send list.
7. Click Transfer All.
The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring of the selected files.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
8. Click Yes to view the message log in Notepad. Click No to close the message box.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 81
![Page 84: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Transferring waypoint files to a GIS device
Note – Before you transfer files from device, you should connect it to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend on the type of device.
To transfer waypoint files to a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office / Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. Select the Send tab.
3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files from. The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where <device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
4. Select the Receive tab.
5. Click Add and select Waypoint from the list that appears.
6. The Open dialog appears. Browse for the waypoint file that contains the waypoints you want to transfer, then highlight the file and click Open.
82 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 85: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
The Open dialog closes and the Waypoint Filter dialog appears.
7. Select the waypoint range you want to send. In the Filter group, select All to send the entire file, or select Range to send selected waypoints only.
8. If you selected Range, enter the range of waypoints to send in the Start and End fields.
9. In the Start position in datalogger field, enter the number you want to start numbering the transferred waypoints from. If you have waypoints on the device that you do not want to overwrite, enter a number that is greater than the highest existing waypoint number.
10. Click OK.
The Waypoint Filter dialog closes and you are returned to the Data Transfer dialog. The waypoint file you selected is added to the Files to Send list. If you selected a waypoint range, the range is added to the filename.
11. Click Transfer All.
The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring of the selected files.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
12. Click Yes to view the message log in Notepad. Click No to close the message box.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 83
![Page 86: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Transferring waypoints from a GIS device
Note – Before you transfer files from any device, you should connect it to your computer and prepare it for transfer. The tasks required depend on the type of device.
To transfer waypoint files from a GIS device:
1. Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:
– From the desktop:
Double-click a shortcut to the Data Transfer utility.
Click Start then select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office / Data Transfer.
– In the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
Select the Data Transfer tool on the toolbar.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
2. Select the Receive tab.
3. From the Device list, select the device you want to transfer files to.
The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to <device>, where <device> represents the type of device, such as a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
4. Click Add and select Waypoint from the list that appears.
5. The Open dialog appears. Browse for the waypoint file that contains the waypoints you want to transfer, then highlight the file and click Open.
84 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 87: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
The Open dialog closes and the Waypoint Filter dialog appears.
6. Select the waypoint range you want to receive. In the Filter group, select All to transfer the entire file, or select Range to transfer selected waypoints only.
7. If you selected Range, enter the range of waypoints to receive in the Start and End fields.
8. In the Output File field, enter the full path and filename where you want to store the transferred waypoints on your office computer, or click Browse to browse for a folder.
9. Click OK.
The Waypoint Filter dialog closes and you are returned to the Data Transfer dialog. The waypoint file you selected is added to the Files to Receive list. If you selected a waypoint range, the range is added to the filename.
10. Click Transfer All.
The Receiving dialog appears, showing the progress of the transferring of the selected files. When all files have been transferred, the Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device's file format.
If there were errors or problems, a message box appears.
11. Click Yes to view the message log in Microsoft Notepad. Click No to close the message box.
Data Transfer dialog
The Data Transfer dialog is the main dialog of the Data Transfer utility. It appears when you start the Data Transfer utility in standalone mode.
From the Data Transfer dialog you can:
• select the device you want to work with
• preview a list of files to send or receive
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 85
![Page 88: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
• add files to the list or remove them
• begin a transfer
• change global settings
• view or add devices
To open the Data Transfer dialog, do one of the following:
• In GPS Pathfinder Office:
– Select Utilities / Data Transfer.
– Select the Data Transfer tool on the Utilities toolbar.
Devices
Click Devices to open the Devices dialog where you can view a list of devices, view properties for a device, or rename, delete, or add devices, as shown in Table 15.2.
Table 15.2 Devices dialog contents
Option Description
Status icon
This icon represents the transfer direction (sending or receiving), the type of device selected, and the connection status (connected or disconnected). For example, the icon above shows that the computer is connected to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software and is ready to receive files.
Receive tab Use the Receive tab to select files from a device and transfer them to your computer.
Send tab Use the Send tab to select files on your computer and transfer them to a device.
Settings Click Settings to open the Global Settings dialog where you can set properties that apply to all transfer operations on all devices.
86 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 89: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Receive tab
Use the Receive tab on the Data Transfer dialog to select files from a device and transfer them to your computer.
Table 15.3 shows the contents of the Receive tab.
Table 15.3 Receive tab contents
Option Description
Files to Receive This list shows the files you have selected to receive from the device. If you have not selected any files yet, the message Press Add to select files appears. Use Add, Remove, and Remove All to edit the list of files, and use Transfer All to transfer all of the files shown.
Add Click Add to add files to the Files to Receive list.
Remove Click Remove to clear the selected file in the Files to Receive list. Removing a file from this list does not delete it from the device.
Remove All Click Remove All to clear the Files to Receive list. Removing files from this list does not delete them from the device, the Files to Send list, or the Files to Receive list for other devices.
Transfer All Click Transfer All to copy all the files shown in the Receive tab to the office PC from the device.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 87
![Page 90: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Send tab
Use the Send tab on the Data Transfer dialog to select files on your computer and transfer them to a device.
Table 15.4 shows the contents of the Send tab.
Table 15.4 Send tab contents
Option Description
Files to Send This list shows the files you have selected to send to the device. If you have not selected any files yet, the message Press Add to select files appears. Use Add, Remove, and Remove All to edit the list of files, and use Transfer All to transfer all of the files shown.
Add Click Add to add files to the Files to Send list.
Remove Click Remove to clear the selected file in the Files to Send list. Removing a file from this list does not delete it from the office PC.
Remove All Click Remove All to clear the Files to Send list. Removing files from this list does not delete them from the office PC, the Files to Receive list, or the Files to Send list for other devices.
88 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 91: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Control menu
The control menu groups together commands to control the Data Transfer application window.
To display the control menu, click the Data Transfer icon at the top left of the title bar of the Data Transfer dialog, or right click anywhere on the title bar.
Transfer All Click Transfer All to copy all the files shown in the Send tab to the device.
Retain File List for this Data Transfer Session
This check box controls whether the list of files is retained after transfer. Select it to leave the files in the Files to Send list after you click Transfer All. Clear it to remove all files sent from the list after they have been transferred.
Select ... to ...
Restore restore the application window to its previous size and location
Move move the window using arrow keys
Size resize the window using arrow keys
Minimize reduce the window to an icon on the Taskbar
Maximize enlarge the application window to full screen
Close quit Data Transfer and close the application window
About Data Transfer display the About Data Transfer dialog
Refresh refresh the Data Transfer dialog and re-connect to the selected device
New copy of Data Transfer
open another copy of Data Transfer
Table 15.4 Send tab contents
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 89
![Page 92: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
About Data Transfer dialog
The About Data Transfer dialog contains important copyright and licensing information, including the version of the software, your registration name, and your serial number.
To display the About Data Transfer dialog, select About Data Transfer from the Control menu.
Note – It is not permissible to copy this program except for archival and backup purposes.
Global Settings dialog
Use the Global Settings dialog to set properties for the Data Transfer utility. These properties apply to all transfer operations to or from any device. The settings are saved when you close the Data Transfer utility, so they remain the same until you change them.
To open the Global Settings dialog from the standalone Data Transfer utility, click Settings in the Data Transfer dialog. The options are shown in Table 15.5
Table 15.5 Global Settings dialog contents
Option Description
Query file overwrites If the file you are transferring has the same name as an existing file, it overwrites the existing file. Select this check box to display a message requiring confirmation before overwriting. Clear the check box to overwrite existing files without asking for confirmation.
Make backup copies of data files
Select this check box to create backup copies of files on your computer after they have been transferred to a device.
Delete files on device after transfer
Select this check box to delete files on the device after they have been successfully transferred to your computer. Clear the check box to leave the transferred files on the device after they have been copied to your computer.
90 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 93: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Devices dialog
The Devices dialog lets you see a list of the devices you have defined so far in the Data Transfer utility.
You can add, delete, or rename devices, and view device properties.
To open this dialog from the standalone Data Transfer utility, click Devices in the Data Transfer dialog�
Table 15.6 shows the contents of the Devices dialog.
Table 15.6 Devices dialog contents
Option Description
Devices This list shows all the devices that have been defined so far. To rename a device, right-click on it and from the menu select Rename. You can also right-click to delete the device or view its Properties dialog.
New Click New to start the Add Device wizard and add a new device.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 91
![Page 94: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Properties dialog
The Properties dialog shows the connection settings for the devices you have already defined.
To display the Properties dialog for a device when running the Data Transfer utility in standalone mode, do one of the following:
• Select the device and click Properties in the Devices dialog.
• Right-click on the device in the Devices dialog and from the shortcut menu select Properties.
To display the Properties dialog when running the Data Transfer utility from another application, right-click on the device in the Open dialog or the Save As dialog and from the shortcut menu select Properties.
The tabs available on the Properties dialog depend on the type of device connected:
The Device Properties tab appears when the device is one of the following:
• GPS receiver (4000 Series)
• GPS receiver (5000 Series)
• GIS data collector
• GIS PC card
• GIS folder
Delete Select a device and click Delete to remove the device definition from the list. To connect to the device after you have deleted you must use the Add Device wizard to add a new device.
Properties Select a device and click Properties to open the Properties dialog for that device.
Table 15.6 Devices dialog contents (Continued)
Option Description
92 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 95: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
The Device Properties tab (E-mail devices only) appears when the device is a GIS E-mail device.
The Download Properties tab appears when the device is a GPS receiver (4000 Series).
The Conversion Properties tab appears when the device is a GPS receiver (5000 Series).
The Connection Settings dialog from the Microsoft ActiveSync software appears when the device is a GIS data collector on Windows CE.
The standard Windows Explorer disk drive or folder property dialogs appear when the device is a Survey data card.
Device Properties tab
The Device Properties tab on the Properties dialog shows the general connection properties of devices.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 93
![Page 96: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.7 shows the contents in the Device Properties tab:�
Table 15.7 Device Properties tab contents
Option Description
Class Shows the general type of the device. It matches the device type you selected in the Add Device wizard.
For example, it may show GPS receiver or Survey Controller, or GIS data collector.
Type Shows more specific details of the type of the device, if applicable. For example, if the Class field shows GPS receiver, this field shows the receiver model, or if the Class field shows GIS folder, the Type field shows the data collector type the folder represents.
Port Shows the serial (COM) port the device is connected to.
TIP: To change the port a device is connected to, you must delete the device definition and create a new definition that uses the new port. You cannot change the selected port here.
Location If the device is a GIS folder or PC card, the Location field appears instead of the Port field. This shows the drive or folder a PC card is connected as, or the path of a folder device.
��������������� �������������������������������������������������
������������������������������������������
��������������������������������
Note – This control is not available if the receiver is a mapping receiver.
94 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 97: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
���������������
Select ...
Hardware (RTS/CTS)
Software(XON/XOFF)
���������������������������������������������
���������������������������������������
����������������������������������������������
������������������
to use ...
flow control commands generated by the receiver.
flow control commands generated by Data Transfer.
Note – This control is not available if the receiver is a mapping receiver.
��������� ���������������������!������"�������������
�����������������������������"�����!����
������������������������ ���������������
����������������������������������������
��������������������������!��
Note – This control is not available if the receiver is a mapping receiver.
#���� �����������!������!������"�������������������
����!������!������"�����!�����������
����������������
Note – This control is not available if the receiver is a mapping receiver.
���!����� ��������������!�������!������"�������������
����������������������!�������"�����!����
������������������������ ���������������
����������������������������������������
��������������������������!��
Note – This control is not available if the receiver is a mapping receiver.
Table 15.7 Device Properties tab contents (Continued)
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 95
![Page 98: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Download Properties tab
The Download Properties tab of the Properties dialog shows downloading settings for GPS receivers.
Max retries Enter a value in this field or cycle through the values to specify the number of times the Data Transfer utility tries to transfer files to or from this device if the connection is lost during transfer.
Timeout (secs) Enter a value in this field or cycle through the values to specify how long each attempt to transfer files lasts.
Table 15.7 Device Properties tab contents (Continued)
Option Description
96 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 99: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.8 shows the contents of the Download Properties tab.
Progress dialogs
Progress dialogs appear when you begin transferring files.
If you are transferring files from your PC to a device, first the Converting dialog appears, then the Sending dialog.
If you are transferring files from a device to your PC, first the Receiving dialog appears, then the Converting dialog.
Table 15.8 Download Properties tab contents
Option Description
Concatenate Files on Download
If logging is interrupted, files stored in a receiver can have the same name. The receiver closes the original file when logging stops (for example, because of a power failure), then opens a new file of the same name when logging resumes. If you select this check box, the Data Transfer utility joins files of the same name together when it transfers them from the receiver. If this check box is cleared, files are not concatenated when they are transferred to your office computer.
Warnings Use this group to specify when to display a warning message.
Select ... to ...
Always display the warning message for each file you transfer.
Once display the warning message for the first file you transfer only.
Never suppress the warning message.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 97
![Page 100: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Converting dialog
Before transferring files to or from a device, the Converting dialog appears while files are being converted to the required file format.
Conversion is always performed on the computer, not the device.
Table 15.9 shows the contents of the Converting dialog.
Table 15.9 Converting dialog contents
Option Description
Status icon This animated icon shows that conversion is in progress.
Progress indicator Shows the progress of the conversion of the current file.
File name Shows the name of the file being converted.
Cancel Click Cancel to stop converting files. Any further conversion or transfer is stopped but files that have already been converted or transferred are not deleted or converted back to their old format.
98 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 101: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Receiving dialog
The Receiving dialog appears when you begin transferring files from a device. This dialog shows the progress of the transfer operation. Once files have been received, the Converting dialog appears while they are being converted.
Table 15.10 shows the contents of the Receiving dialog.
Sending dialog
The Sending dialog appears when you begin transferring files to a device. This dialog shows the progress of the transfer operation. Before files are sent, the Converting dialog may appear while they are being converted into the required format.
Table 15.10 Receiving dialog contents
Option Description
Status icon This animated icon shows the computer on the right and the selected device on the left, with files moving from the device to the computer to indicate that the transfer is in progress.
Progress indicator
������������������������ ������������������
�����
File name Shows the name of the file being transferred.
Records transferred Shows the number of records from the current file that have been transferred.
Cancel Click Cancel to stop transferring files. Any further transferring is stopped but files that have already been transferred are not deleted from the destination.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 99
![Page 102: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.11 shows the contents of the Sending dialog.
Associated Files dialog
When you send a configuration (.ccf) or coordinate system export (.cse) file to a GIS device, you must also send any associated files such as datum or projection files.
Table 15.11 Sending dialog contents
Option Description
Status icon This animated icon shows the computer on the left and the selected device on the right, with files moving from the computer to the device to indicate that the transfer is in progress.
Progress indicator
������������������������ ������������������
�����
File name Shows the name of the file being transferred.
Records transferred Shows the number of records from the current file that have been transferred.
Cancel Click Cancel to stop transferring files. Any further transferring is stopped but files that have already been transferred are not deleted from the device.
100 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 103: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
The Associated Files dialog appears only if there are files associated with the file you are sending. Table 15.12 shows the contents of the Associated Files dialog.
Coordinate System dialog
Use the Coordinate System dialog to select a coordinate system, zone, and datum, or a site, to transfer to a GIS data collector. This dialog is the same as the Coordinate System dialog in the main GPS Pathfinder Office program. This dialog also appears if you click Change in the Load Background Files dialog.
To display the Coordinate System dialog, select the Send tab in the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Coordinate System from the drop-down list.
Note – Use this dialog to send a single coordinate system or site to a CE device running the TerraSync software. This coordinate system overwrites any existing coordinate systems in the TerraSync software. If you want to use more than one coordinate system in the TerraSync software, create a coordinate system export (.cse) file and select the Coordinate System Export File option from Add.
For details on the fields in this dialog, see the Chapter 11, The Coordinate System Manager.
Load Background Files dialog
Use the Load Background Files dialog to select the background files you want to transfer to a data collector. This dialog is the same as the Load Background Files dialog in the main GPS Pathfinder Office program, with the addition of a Destination field for selecting the location you want to transfer the files to.
Table 15.12 Associated Files dialog contents
Option Description
List box The files associated with the .ccf or .cse file you selected are listed here.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 101
![Page 104: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
To display the Load Background Files dialog, select the Send tab in the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Background from the drop-down list.
Table 15.13 shows the contents of the Load Background Files dialog.
Table 15.13 Load Background Files dialog contents
Option Description
File Names The File Names list displays the name and path of background files. A check mark before a file indicates the file will be added to the Files to Send list in the Data Transfer dialog. Unchecked files will not be added to the list and will not be transferred.
Add Click Add to add background files to the list. The Add Background Files dialog appears. You can add background files from different drives and folders by selecting them in this dialog.
Add Web map Click Add web map to add background files from an Internet map server (IMS) to the list. The Internet Map wizard appears. Follow the instructions to download maps from the IMS. For more information, see Chapter 1, GPS Pathfinder Office Software.
Remove Click Remove to remove the currently highlighted background file(s) from the list. The background file itself is not deleted from the folder where it is stored.
Destination
Select ...
Main Memory
PC Card
Select the location on the data collector you want to copy the files to.
to copy files to ...
the main memory of the data collector
a PC card installed in the data collector If the device is not a data collector or does not have a PC card installed, the PC Card option is unavailable and you can only select Main Memory.
102 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 105: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Receive Almanac dialog
When you connect to a data collector and transfer data files, a current almanac is automatically transferred from the data collector to your office PC. You can also choose to transfer an almanac file manually. You can transfer this file to the default location, or to a different drive or folder.
To display the Receive Almanac dialog, select the Receive tab in the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Almanac from the drop-down list.
Coordinate system of selected file(s)
When you add a file to the list, the software assumes that it is in the current coordinate system (except for .ssf files, which are always in the Lat/Long coordinate system). If the file is in a different coordinate system, add it to the list, then when you return to the Load Background Files dialog, click Change and assign it the correct coordinate system.
The lower panel of the dialog contains information on the coordinate system assigned to the file(s) highlighted in the list box.
Warning – If you want to load a raster background file, it must match the current coordinate system. Raster files cannot be transformed.
Change Click Change to open the Coordinate System dialog, where you can assign a different coordinate system to the file(s) highlighted in the list above. Background files do not contain any information on the coordinate system to which the positions in the file are referenced.
Note – Change does not alter coordinates; it simply specifies the coordinate system so that the software can interpret the coordinates correctly.
Table 15.13 Load Background Files dialog contents
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 103
![Page 106: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.14 shows the contents of the Receive Almanac dialog.
Waypoint Filter dialog (receive waypoints)
Use the Waypoint Filter dialog to select which waypoints you want to transfer from a data collector.
}To display the Waypoint Filter dialog, select the Receive tab in the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Waypoint from the drop-down list.
Table 15.14 Receive Almanac dialog contents
Option Description
Output File The filename and location the almanac file will be transferred to appears in this field. By default this is C:\Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Almanacs\Almanac.ssf. You can edit the path or filename shown, or click Browse to select a different location or filename.
Browse Click Browse to open the Save As dialog. Select a folder and, if required, edit the filename in the File Name field. Click Save to return to the Receive Almanac dialog. The path and name of the selected file are copied into the Output File field.
104 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 107: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.15 shows the contents of the Waypoint Filter dialog.
Table 15.15 Waypoint Filter dialog (receive waypoints) contents
Option Description
������ ��������� �����������������������
��������������
Select ... to ...
All send all waypoints in the selected file, or receive all waypoints stored on the data collector
Range send or receive a selection of waypoints
Start If you selected Range in the Filter group, enter the number of the first waypoint in the range to send or receive in this field.
End If you selected Range in the Filter group, enter the number of the last waypoint in the range to send or receive in this field.
Output File Enter the full path and filename where you want to store the transferred waypoints on your office computer, or click Browse to browse for a folder.
Browse Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog. Select a folder and click OK to return to the Waypoint Filter dialog. The path and name of the selected folder are copied into the Output File field.
OK When you have selected the waypoints you want to receive, click OK to close this dialog and return to the Data Transfer dialog. The selected waypoint range appears in the Files to Receive list.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 105
![Page 108: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Overview
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Waypoint Filter dialog (send waypoints)
Use the Waypoint Filter dialog to select which waypoints you want to transfer to a data collector.
To display the Waypoint Filter dialog, select the Send tab in the Data Transfer dialog, click Add, and select Waypoint from the drop-down list. The Open dialog appears. Select a waypoint file from the Open dialog, and click Open.
Table 15.16 shows the contents of the Waypoint Filter dialog.
Table 15.16 Waypoint Filter dialog (send waypoints) contents
Option Description
Filter Use this group to select which waypoints to send.
Select ... to ...
All send all waypoints in the selected file
Range send a selection of waypoints form the file
Start If you selected Range in the Filter group, enter the number of the first waypoint in the range to send in this field.
End If you selected Range in the Filter group, enter the number of the last waypoint in the range to send in this field.
Start position in datalogger
Waypoints on GeoExplorer data collectors are numbered sequentially. When you transfer waypoints to a GeoExplorer data collector and do not want to overwrite existing waypoints, you must enter a starting number for the new waypoints that is greater than the highest-numbered waypoint on the data collector.
106 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 109: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Overview 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
For example, if your data collector has 10 waypoints stored, you must number transferred waypoints from 11 or higher if you do not want to overwrite the existing waypoints.
Enter a number in this field to set the starting position.
Note – With an Asset Surveyor data collector, or the TerraSync software, waypoints are always appended.
OK When you have selected the waypoints you want to send, click OK to close this dialog and return to the Data Transfer dialog. The selected waypoint file appears in the Files to Send list. If you have selected a range of waypoints from the file, the range is appended to the filename.
Table 15.16 Waypoint Filter dialog (send waypoints) contents
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 107
![Page 110: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
15.3Add Device wizardThe Add Device wizard guides you through the steps required to add a new device definition for data transfer. Before adding a device definition using the wizard, you need to physically connect the device to the computer.
To start the Add Device wizard when the Data Transfer utility is running in standalone mode, click Devices in the Data Transfer dialog, then click New in the Devices dialog.
The steps in the Add Device wizard depend on the type of device you select in the first step, and are described in the following sections.
If you have a survey-grade GPS receiver you can add a receiver device:
• GPS receiver (4000 series)
If you have the GPS Pathfinder Office software installed you can add a GIS device:
• GIS data collector
• GIS data collector on Windows CE device
• GIS PC card
• GIS folder
• GIS E-mail device
15.3.1 Create New Device Step
The first step of the Add Device wizard is the Create New Device step. This step lets you select the type of device you want to add to your list. You need to select the option that matches the device you want to connect to.
For example:
To connect to a GeoExplorer 3 data collector you must create a GIS data collector device definition.
108 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 111: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.17 shows the contents of the Create New Device step:
Add New Device – GIS datalogger step
In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify which serial port on your computer the datalogger (data collector) is connected to.
Table 15.17 Create New Device contents
Option Description
List of device types The types of devices you can connect to are shown in this list. Select the option that matches the type of device you want to connect. The other steps in the wizard depend on the device you selected.
OK Click OK to confirm the device type you have selected.
The next step in the Add Device wizard depends on the device type you select in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 109
![Page 112: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.18 shows the contents of the Add New Device – GIS datalogger step.
Table 15.18 Add New Device – GIS datalogger contents
Option Description
Serial Port Select a serial (COM) port from this list to connect to a data collector on that port.
Note – Once you have added a device, you cannot change the serial port it connects to. If you want to change the port a device connects to, delete the existing device definition and then create a new device definition that uses the correct port.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of device, click Cancel and start the Add Device wizard again.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device definition and close the Add Device wizard. The new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
110 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 113: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Add New Device step
Use this step of the Add Device wizard to give the new device a name that will identify it in your list of devices:
Table 15.19 shows the contents of the Add New Device step.
Table 15.19 Add New Device step contents
Option Description
Name Enter a name for the device in this field, or use the default name that appears.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 111
![Page 114: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Add New Device – Folder step
In this step of the Add Device wizard you specify the folder on your computer or network drive you want to set up as a device:
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device definition and close the Add Device wizard. The new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.19 Add New Device step contents
Option Description
112 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 115: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.20 shows the contents of the Add New Device – Folder step.
Table 15.20 Add New Device – Folder contents
Option Description
Folder Type the path and the folder name in this field, or click Browse to search for a folder.
Note – You must select an existing folder name.
Browse Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog. Select a folder and click OK to return to the Add New Device ñ Folder step. The path and name of the selected folder appears in the Folder field.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of device, click Cancel and start the Add Device wizard again.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device definition and close the Add Device wizard. The new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 113
![Page 116: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Add New Device – PC Card step
When a PC card is inserted into the PCMCIA slot on your office computer, it will function like a disk drive with its own drive letter. In this step of the Add Device wizard you specify the drive letter for a PC card:
Table 15.21 shows the contents of the Add New Device – PC Card step.
Table 15.21 Add New Device – PC Card step contents
Option Description
Drive Select the drive letter from this list that represents the GIS PC card.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of device, click Cancel and start the Add Device wizard again.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
114 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 117: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Add New Device step (Select file type)
Use this step of the Add Device wizard to specify the type of GIS data collector the PC card will be inserted into. The data collector type you select controls the types of files you can transfer to or from the PC card, and how files are converted.
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device definition and close the Add Device wizard. The new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.21 Add New Device – PC Card step contents (Continued)
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 115
![Page 118: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.22 shows the contents of the Add New Device step.
Table 15.22 Add New Device step contents
Option Description
Type Select a data collector type from this field. The options are:
• Asset Surveyor
• TerraSync
Version Select a version from this field if it is available. The options available depend on the data collector you selected from the Type field.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device definition and close the Add Device wizard. The new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
116 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 119: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Add New Device step (select data collector type)
Use this step of the Add Device wizard to specify the type of GIS data collector the selected folder represents. The data collector type you select controls the types of files you can transfer to or from the folder, and how files are converted:
Table 15.23 shows the contents of the Add New Device step.
Table 15.23 Add New Device step (select data collector type) contents
Option Description
Type Select a data collector type from this field. The options are:
• ASPEN
• Asset Surveyor
• TerraSync
• GeoExplorer 3
Version Select a version from this field if it is available. The options available depend on the data collector you selected from the Type field.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 117
![Page 120: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to save the details of the new device definition and close the Add Device wizard. The new device appears in the list of devices.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.23 Add New Device step (select data collector type) contents
Option Description
118 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 121: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Create Remote Device step
In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify the port on your office computer that the device is connected to:
Table 15.24 shows the contents of the Create Remote Device step.
Table 15.24 Create Remote Device step contents
Option Description
Port Select a serial (COM) port from this list to connect to a device on that port. If the device is a 5000 series GPS receiver, you can select USB from this list instead to connect to a USB port.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of device, click Cancel and start the Add Device wizard again.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 119
![Page 122: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard. If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to close the Add Device wizard. The Add New Device step disappears and you are returned to the dialog you started the wizard from. The new device appears in the list of devices in that window.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.24 Create Remote Device step contents (Continued)
Option Description
120 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 123: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Enter Device Name step
Use this step of the Add Device wizard to give the new device a name that will make it easy to identify in your list of devices:
Table 15.25 shows the contents of the Enter Device Name step.
Table 15.25 Enter Device Name step contents
Option Description
Name Enter a name for the device in this field.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard. If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 121
![Page 124: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Finish Click Finish to close the Add Device wizard. The Add New Device step disappears and you are returned to the dialog you started the wizard from. The new device appears in the list of devices in that window.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.25 Enter Device Name step contents (Continued)
Option Description
122 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 125: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Serial Port Properties step
Use this step of the Add Device wizard to set the serial port properties to allow your computer to communicate with the device:
Table 15.26 shows the contents of the Serial Port Properties step.
Table 15.26 Serial Port Properties step contents
Option Description
Class This field shows the general type of the device you are adding. This corresponds to the device type you selected in the Create New Device step.
Type This field shows the specific type of device this new device definition represents.
Port This field shows the port the device is connected to. This is the port you selected in the Create Remote Device step.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 123
![Page 126: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Maximum baud rate If this list is available, select the highest baud rate the Data Transfer utility will use when trying to connect to the device. If this list is not available, the device can only connect at one baud rate.
Use flow control Select this check box to enable flow control. When flow control is in use, data is only transmitted to the device when it signals that it is ready to receive data.
Select ... to use ...
Hardware (RTS/CTS)
flow control commands generated by the device
Software (XON/XOFF)
flow control commands generated by the Data Transfer utility.
If this group is not available, flow control cannot be used with this device.
Data bits Select the data bits option required from this list. The number of data bits required depends on the device connected. If this list is unavailable you cannot set the number of data bits for this device type.
Parity Select the parity option required from this list. The parity option required depends on the device connected. If this list is unavailable you cannot set the parity for this device type.
Stop bits Select the stop bits option required from this list. The number of stop bits required depends on the device connected. If this list is unavailable you cannot set the number of stop bits for this device type.
Max retries Enter a value in this field or cycle through the values to specify the number of times the Data Transfer utility tries to transfer files to or from this device if the connection is lost during transfer.
Table 15.26 Serial Port Properties step contents (Continued)
Option Description
124 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 127: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Timeout (secs) Enter a value in this field or cycle through the values to specify how long each attempt to transfer files lasts.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard. If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to close the Add Device wizard. The Serial Port Properties step closes and you are returned to the dialog you started the wizard from. The new device appears in the list of devices in that window.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.26 Serial Port Properties step contents (Continued)
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 125
![Page 128: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
USB Port Properties step
Use this step of the Add Device wizard to set the connection properties to allow your computer to communicate with the GPS receiver:
Table 15.27 shows the contents of the Serial Port Properties step.
Table 15.27 Serial Port Properties step contents
Option Description
Class This field shows the general type of the device you are adding. This corresponds to the device type you selected in the Create New Device step.
Type This field shows the specific type of device the new device definition represents.
Port This field shows the port the device is connected to. This is the port you selected in the Create Remote Device step.
126 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 129: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Max retries Enter a value in this field or cycle through the values to specify the number of times the Data Transfer utility tries to transfer files to or from this device if the connection is lost during transfer.
Timeout (secs) Enter a value in this field or cycle through the values to specify how long each attempt to transfer files lasts.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard. If this button is unavailable, this is the last step in the wizard.
Finish Click Finish to close the Add Device wizard. The Device Properties step closes and you are returned to the dialog you started the wizard from. The new device appears in the list of devices in that window.
If this button is unavailable, you cannot finish in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.27 Serial Port Properties step contents (Continued)
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 127
![Page 130: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Download Properties step
Use this step of the Add Device wizard to specify settings for importing files from a receiver:
128 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 131: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.28 shows the contents of the Download Properties step.
Table 15.28 Download Properties step contents
Option Description
Concatenate Files on Download
Files stored in a receiver can have the same name if logging is interrupted. The receiver closes the original file when logging stops (because, for example, of a power failure), then opens a new file of the same name when logging resumes. If you select this check box, the Data Transfer utility joins files of the same name together when it imports them from the receiver. If this check box is cleared, files are not concatenated when they are imported.
Warnings Use this group to specify when to display a warning message.
Select ... to ...
Always display the warning message for each file you import.
Once display the warning message for the first file you import only.
Never suppress the warning message.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
Next This button is unavailable. This is the final step in the Add Device wizard.
Finish Click Finish to confirm the download properties and end the Add Device wizard. The Download Properties step disappears and you are returned to the dialog you started the wizard from. The new device appears in the list of devices in that window.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 129
![Page 132: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Conversion Properties step
Use this step of the Add Device wizard to specify conversion settings for file transfer:
Table 15.29 shows the contents of the Conversion Properties step.
Table 15.29 Conversion Properties step contents
Option Description
Display summary on completion
If you select this check box, the Data Transfer utility displays a conversion summary when it has finished transferring files. If this check box is cleared, no summary appears.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
130 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 133: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Adding a device definition for a 4000 series GPS receiver
1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GPS Receiver (4000 Series) from the list of device types and click OK.
The Create Remote Device step appears.
3. From the Port field, select the serial (COM) port the receiver will connect to, then click Next.
The Enter Device Name step appears.
4. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device definition, then click Next.
The Serial Port Properties step appears.
5. Set the baud rate, flow control, and connection properties for this receiver, then click Next.
The Create Remote Device step appears.
6. Specify the file download settings for this receiver.
7. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device definition is displayed in the list of devices.
Finish Click Finish to confirm the conversion properties and end the Add Device wizard. The Conversion Properties step disappears and you are returned to the dialog you started the wizard from. The new device appears in the list of devices in that window.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.29 Conversion Properties step contents (Continued)
Option Description
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 131
![Page 134: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Add New Device – E-Mail Device step
In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify which mail account or network user profile to use:
132 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 135: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.30 shows the contents of the Add New Device – E-Mail Device step.
Table 15.30 Add New Device – E-Mail Device step contents
Option Description
Profile Name Select the name of the user profile that you want to use to log in to the messaging application (Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora). This profile is used to send e-mails from this device definition in the Data Transfer utility to a CE device running the TerraSync software, and to receive e-mails from the CE device.
Note – Your user profile is not your e-mail address.
Password Enter the password for the selected profile in this field. If you do not enter a password, you will be prompted to enter it every time you send or receive files using this device definition. Including the password makes the transfer faster and simpler, but leaving the Password field blank is more secure.
Back This button is unavailable. To change the type of device, click Cancel and start the Add Device wizard again.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
Finish This button is unavailable. You cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 133
![Page 136: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Add New Device – E-Mail Device step (Specify outgoing mail options)
In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify the options for sending files with this device definition:
134 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 137: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.31 shows the contents of the Add New Device – E-Mail Device step.
Table 15.31 Add New Device – E-Mail Device step contents
Option Description
Subject Prefix In this field, enter the text you want to use as a prefix to the subject line of all e-mails sent using this device. The full subject line consists of the prefix you define here, followed by the filename of the file you sent, and its size in kilobytes.
Note – The default value for this field is “Trimble File”. The text you specify in this field must match the text specified in the TerraSync software in the Receive via E-mail form. If you change this text from the default value, you must change the text in the TerraSync software accordingly, or the TerraSync software will be unable to successfully identify e-mails with attached Trimble data files.
Note – Even if you select multiple files to send, each file is sent in a separate e-mail. If a file requires associated files to be sent, or when the conversion process creates additional files, all associated files are attached to the same e-mail as the file you sent.When you use a subject line prefix, the recipient of the files can easily identify those e-mails that contain data files from the GPS Pathfinder Office software.
To In the To field, enter the e-mail address of the recipient, or click To to open the address book from your default e-mail editor, where you can select an e-mail address.
If you specify a recipient, this device definition can only be used to send files to that e-mail address. If you leave the To field blank, you can send files to any e-mail address, and you are prompted to enter a recipient whenever you send files using this device definition.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 135
![Page 138: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Add New Device – E-Mail Device step (Specify incoming mail options)
In this step of the Add Device wizard you must specify the options for receiving files with this device definition:
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
Finish This button is unavailable. You cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
Table 15.31 Add New Device – E-Mail Device step contents (Continued)
Option Description
136 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 139: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Table 15.32 shows the contents of the Add New Device – E-Mail Device step.
Table 15.32 Add New Device – E-Mail Device step contents
Option Description
Process only e-mails with subjects containing
In this field, enter the text that will be used in the subject line of all e-mails received using this device.
This text must match the text specified in the TerraSync software in the Send via E-mail form.
When you use agreed subject line text, e-mails that include this text in their subject line are recognized by the device as containing files sent from the field. If an e-mail does not include this text, the data files attached to it are not included in the Open dialog when you select files to receive.
Note – The default value for this field is "Trimble File". The text you specify in this field must match the text specified in the TerraSync software in the Send via E-mail form. If you change this text from the default value, you must change the text in the TerraSync software accordingly, or the Data Transfer utility will be unable to successfully identify e-mails with attached Trimble data files.
Back Click Back to move to the previous step in the Add Device wizard.
Next Click Next to move to the next step in the Add Device wizard.
Finish This button is unavailable. You cannot finish the Add Device wizard in this step.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon adding a new device and return to the dialog you opened the Add Device wizard from.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 137
![Page 140: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Adding a device definition for a GIS data collector
1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS Datalogger from the list of device types and click OK.
The Add New Device – GIS Datalogger step appears.
3. From the Serial Port field, select the serial (COM) port the receiver will connect to, then click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
4. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device definition.
5. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device definition is displayed in the list of devices.
Adding a device definition for a GIS data collector on Windows CE
1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS Datalogger on Windows-CE from the list of device types and click OK.
The Add New Device step appears.
3. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device definition.
4. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device definition is displayed in the list of devices.
138 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 141: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Adding a device definition for a GIS PC card
1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS PC Card from the list of device types and click OK.
The Add New Device – PC Card step appears.
3. From the Drive field, select the drive the PC card is connected as, then click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
4. From the Type field, select the type of files you will send to this device, then click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
5. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device definition.
6. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device definition is displayed in the list of devices.
Adding a device definition for a GIS folder
1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS Folder from the list of device types and click OK.
The Add New Device – Folder step appears.
3. Select the folder to connect to. Do one of the following:
– Type a drive and path in the Folder field.
– Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog, select a drive and folder, and click OK.
4. Click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 139
![Page 142: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
5. From the Type field, select the type of files you will send to this device, then click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
6. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device definition.
7. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device definition is displayed in the list of devices.
Adding a device definition for a GIS E-mail device
1. Start the Add Device wizard.
The Create New Device step appears.
2. Select GIS E-Mail Device from the list of device types and click OK.
The Add New Device – E-Mail Device step appears.
3. From the Profile Name field, select a username, or enter your username.
4. In the Password field, enter the password for the selected username, or leave this field blank to be prompted for the password each time you send files using this device definition.
5. Click Next.
The Add New Device – E-Mail Device step appears.
6. In the Subject Prefix field, enter the text that you want to include in the Subject field of each e-mail.
The subject line of each e-mail consists of this prefix, the filename, and the file size.
7. Specify a recipient for the e-mail. Do one of the following:
– In the To field, enter the e-mail address that you want to send the files to.
140 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 143: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
– Click To and select a recipient from your e-mail editor's address book.
– Leave this field blank to be prompted for a recipient each time you send an e-mail.
8. Click Next.
The Add New Device – E-Mail Device step appears.
9. In the Process only e-mails with subjects containing field, enter the subject line text that the remote device will use to identify e-mails with Trimble data files attached.
10. Click Next.
The Add New Device step appears.
11. In the Name field, enter a name to identify this device definition.
12. Click Finish. The Add Device wizard ends and you are returned to the window you opened the wizard from. The new device definition is displayed in the list of devices.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 141
![Page 144: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
15.3.2 Types of Devices
To connect to a device with the GPS Pathfinder Office software, you must create a device definition using the correct device type, as shown in Table 15.33. For information about each device, the file types you can transfer to or from it, and its connection details, click on its name or icon.
Table 15.33 Types of devices
If you want to connect to a .. select this device type
GeoExplorer 3 GIS datalogger
GeoExplorer II GIS datalogger
GeoExplorer GIS datalogger
CE device running the TerraSync software GIS datalogger on Windows CE
TSC1 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
TDC1 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
TDC2 running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
MC-V running the Asset Surveyor software GIS datalogger
PC card from a GIS data collector GIS PC card
Folder on your computer or network GIS folder
E-mail account E-mail device
Field computer running the ASPEN software GIS datalogger
142 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 145: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard 15
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Pathfinder Basic GIS datalogger
4600LS receiver GPS receiver
4700 receiver GPS receiver
4800 receiver GPS receiver
Series 4000 receiver GPS receiver
Table 15.33 Types of devices (Continued)
If you want to connect to a .. select this device type
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 143
![Page 146: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
15 The Data Transfer Utility – Add Device wizard
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
144 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 147: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
C H A P T E R
16
16 Data CollectorsIn this chapter:
■ Introduction
■ Asset Surveyor software
■ MC-V data collector
■ TSC1 data collector
■ TDC1 data collector
■ TDC2 data collector
■ GeoExplorer 3 handheld data collector
■ GeoExplorer II data collector
■ GeoExplorer data collector
■ GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector
![Page 148: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.1IntroductionThis chapter explains how to configure the following data collectors to communicate with your office equipment:
• data collectors running the Asset Surveyor software
• the GeoExplorer series of data collectors
• the GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector
146 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 149: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.2 Asset Surveyor SoftwareThe Asset Surveyor software runs on the following data collectors:
• TSC1
• TDC1
• TDC2
• MC-V
Use the GIS data collector device type to connect to a data collector running Asset Surveyor. The following sections explain what to do.
16.2.1 Preparing a Data Collector Running Asset Surveyor Software for Data Transfer
In order to communicate with the office computer, the data collector must be in File Transfer mode.
To prepare a data collector running Asset Surveyor for data transfer:
1. Connect the data collector to the office computer.
2. Turn on the data collector and from the main menu select File Manager.
3. From the File Manager menu select File Transfer.
The Asset Surveyor software displays the File Transfer status form:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 147
![Page 150: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Throughout the file transfer session, the Asset Surveyor software will display status information on the second line of this form.
4. When data transfer between the data collector and the office computer is complete, press = (TDC1) or = (TSC1, TDC2, and MC-V) on the data collector to exit File Transfer mode.
16.2.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Data Collector Running the Asset Surveyor Software
Table 16.1 shows the data types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.1 File types you can transfer to or from a data collector running the Asset Surveyor software
File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to
Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Background .ssf, .cor, .phs
version 5 or later
Coordinate system .cse
version 4 or later
Data .ssf
version 5 or later
Data dictionary .ddf
Geoid grid .ggf, .dgf, .pgf, .mrp
version 4 or later
Other files .*
Waypoint .wpt
148 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 151: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.3 MC-V Data CollectorThe MC-V runs the Asset Surveyor software. It connects as a GIS data collector device.
16.3.1 Connecting an MC-V Data Collector to Your Computer
An MC-V is connected to the office computer using a null modem cable.
To connect an MC-V to the office computer:
1. Connect one of the DE-9 (female) ends of the null modem cable (part number 18532) to COM1 on the MC-V.
2. Connect the other DE-9 (female) end of the cable to a serial port on the office computer.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 149
![Page 152: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
Figure 16.1 Direct connection between MC-V and the office computer
150 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 153: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.4 TSC1 Data CollectorThe TSC1 data collector runs the Asset Surveyor software. To connect to a TSC1 running Asset Surveyor, choose the GIS data collector device type.
16.4.1 Connecting a TSC1 Data Collector to Your Computer
A TSC1 can be connected to the office computer using either the GPS Pathfinder Office Support Module (OSM) or a cable for a direct connection.
The OSM setup for transferring data to the TSC1 data collector provides external power. Using it lengthens the life of the internal batteries in the data collector.
The direct connection setup for connecting a TSC1 data collector to the office computer uses the internal batteries in the data collector to power the transfer process. Do not use this method if the batteries are low.
To connect a TSC1 to the office computer using the OSM:
1. Connect one end of the OSM-to-PC data cable (part number 14284) to the OSM port labeled Data I/O. Connect the other end to a COM port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
2. Connect the OSM cable to the Hirose to DB9 adaptor cable (P/N 34326). Attach this to the TSC1 download cable (P/N 32287). This cable connects to either the top or bottom port of the TSC1.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 151
![Page 154: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
3. Plug the OSM AC power cord into an AC outlet.
Figure 16.2 Connecting a TSC1 to the office computer using the OSM
To connect a TSC1 directly to the office computer:
1. Connect one end of the TSC1 data/power cable (P/N 30231-00) to the null modem cable (P/N 18352).
2. Connect the null modem cable to the office computer COM port.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
152 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 155: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Figure 16.3 Direct connection between the TSC1 and the office computer
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 153
![Page 156: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.5 TDC1 Data CollectorThe TDC1 data collector runs the Asset Surveyor software. To connect to a TDC1 running Asset Surveyor, choose the GIS data collector device type.
16.5.1 Connecting a TDC1 Data Collector to Your Computer
A TDC1 can be connected to the office computer using either the GPS Pathfinder Office Support Module (OSM-PF) or a cable for a direct connection.
The OSM-PF setup for transferring data to the TDC1 data collector provides external power. Using it lengthens the life of the internal batteries in the data collector.
The direct connection setup for connecting a TDC1 data collector to the office computer uses the internal batteries in the data collector to power the transfer process. Do not use this method if the batteries are low.
To connect a TDC1 to the office computer using the OSM-PF:
1. Connect one end of the OSM-PF-to-PC data cable (part number 14284) to the OSM-PF port labeled Data I/O. Connect the other end to a serial port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
2. Connect the TDC1 data collector directly to the 12-pin Hirose connector on the cable from the OSM-PF.
154 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 157: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
3. Plug the OSM-PF AC power cord into an AC outlet.
Figure 16.4 Connecting a TDC1 to the office computer using the OSM-PF
To connect a TDC1 directly to the office computer:
1. Connect the 12-pin Hirose connector end of the TDC1-to-PC data cable (part number 20887) to the TDC1.
2. Connect the DE-9 (female) end of the cable to the office computer.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 155
![Page 158: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
Figure 16.5 Direct connection between the TDC1 and the office computer
156 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 159: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.6 TDC2 Data CollectorThe TDC2 data collector runs the Asset Surveyor software. To connect to a TDC2 running Asset Surveyor, choose the GIS data collector device type.
16.6.1 Connecting a TDC2 Data Collector to Your Computer
A TDC2 can be connected to the office computer using either the GPS Pathfinder Office Support Module (OSM-PF) or a cable for a direct connection.
The OSM-PF setup for transferring data to the TDC2 data collector provides external power. Using it lengthens the life of the internal batteries in the data collector.
The direct connection setup for connecting a TDC2 data collector to the office computer uses the internal batteries in the data collector to power the transfer process. Do not use this method if the batteries are low.
To connect a TDC2 to the office computer using the OSM-PF:
1. Connect one end of the OSM-PF-to-PC data cable (part number 14284) to the OSM-PF port labeled Data I/O. Connect the other end to a serial port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
2. Connect the TDC2 data collector to the Fischer-to-12-pin Hirose adaptor (part number 27996), and connect this adaptor to the Hirose connector on the cable from the OSM-PF.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 157
![Page 160: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
3. Plug the OSM-PF AC power cord into an AC outlet.
Figure 16.6 Connecting a TDC2 to the office computer using the OSM-PF
To connect a TDC2 directly to the office computer:
1. Connect the Fischer end of the TDC2-to-PC data cable (part number 27997) to the TDC2.
2. Connect the DE-9 (female) end of the cable to the office computer.
158 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 161: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
Figure 16.7 Direct connection between the TDC2 and the office computer
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 159
![Page 162: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.7 GeoExplorer 3 Data CollectorUse the GIS data collector device type to connect to a GeoExplorer 3 data collector.
16.7.1 Receiving an Almanac with GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector
You can tell if your GeoExplorer 3 data collector has received an almanac file by pressing the s button then selecting the GPS tab. The date of the almanac file displays at the bottom of the screen. If the GeoExplorer 3 data collector does not have an almanac file the text Almanac N/A appears.
The simplest way to get a current almanac file is to take your GeoExplorer 3 data collector outside and allow it to calculate positions. It will automatically acquire a new almanac file in about 15 minutes.
16.7.2 Connecting a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector to Your Computer
The GeoExplorer 3 data collector connects to the computer using the support module provided. Alternatively, use the serial clip provided to connect the data collector to the PC.
The support module and serial clip perform the same function and connect to the PC in the same way.
The support module is larger, requires a reasonably flat and stable surface to rest on and is best suited for use in the office. The serial clip does not need to rest on a surface, as it clips directly onto the back of the data collector, so it is useful for connecting to a portable computer in the field.
160 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 163: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
To connect a GeoExplorer 3 data collector to a computer via the support module:
1. Connect one end of a standard null modem cable (part number 18532) to the back of the support module.
2. Connect the other end of the null modem cable to a serial port on the computer.
If the computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the computer end of the cable.
3. Place the data collector in the support module so that the screen faces upwards and the data collector is resting in the support module. Make sure the contact pins on the support module and the contacts on the back of the GeoExplorer 3 data collector are aligned and touching.
To connect a GeoExplorer 3 data collector to a computer via the serial clip:
1. Connect the serial clip to one end of a null modem data cable (part number 18532).
2. Connect the other end of the null modem cable to a serial port on the computer.
If the computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the computer end of the cable.
3. Attach the serial clip to the back of the data collector so that the serial clip locks into place. Make sure the contact pins on the serial clip and the contacts on the back of the data collector are aligned and touching.
Once the GeoExplorer 3 data collector and the computer are connected, you may need to configure the data collector to transfer data. By default, the GeoExplorer 3 data collector is set to enable data transfer through the support module.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 161
![Page 164: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
If you have changed any communication settings from the defaults, or want to use the serial clip, you must change the communication configuration before you can transfer data.
16.7.3 Preparing a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector for Data Transfer
The GeoExplorer 3 data collector can communicate with a computer through either the support module or the serial clip. To transfer data, the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer 3 must be set to the correct mode for the accessory used.
By default, the GeoExplorer 3 data collector is set to enable data transfer through the support module.
To prepare a GeoExplorer 3 data collector for data transfer via the support module:
1. Connect the data collector to the computer with the support module.
2. Make sure that the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer 3 data collector is set to transfer data via the support module. To do this, press the s button then select the Setup tab. Select Configurations / COMMS and set the Data transfer field to Support module.
To prepare a GeoExplorer 3 data collector for data transfer via the serial clip:
1. Connect the data collector to the computer with the serial clip.
2. Make sure that the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer 3 data collector is set to transfer data via the serial clip. To do this, press the s button then select the Setup tab. Select Configurations / COMMS and set the Data transfer field to Serial clip.
162 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 165: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.7.4 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector
Table 16.2 shows the data types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.2 File types you can transfer to or from a GeoExplorer 3 data collector
File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to
Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Configuration .ccf
Coordinate system .cse except
GeoExplorer 3c
Data .ssf except
GeoExplorer 3c
Data dictionary .ddf
Geoid grid .ggf, .dgf, .pgf, .mrp except
GeoExplorer 3c
�������� ����
Waypoint .wpt
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 163
![Page 166: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.8 GeoExplorer II Data CollectorUse the GIS data collector device type to connect to a GeoExplorer II data collector.
16.8.1 Receiving an Almanac with GeoExplorer II Data Collector
You can tell if your GeoExplorer II data collector has received a complete almanac file by switching it off. As the screen is counting down the time to shut down, the letter a is displayed at the bottom of the screen. An upper case A indicates that a complete almanac file was recorded; a lower case a indicates that a complete almanac file was not recorded.
The simplest way to get a current almanac file is to take your data collector outside and allow it to calculate positions. It will automatically acquire a new almanac file in about 45 minutes.
16.8.2 Connecting a GeoExplorer II Data Collector to Your Computer
The GeoExplorer II data collector is connected to the office computer using the data download cable that is supplied with the data collector.
To connect a GeoExplorer II data collector to the office computer:
1. Connect the small circular end of the data download cable to the back of the data collector.
2. Connect the other end of the data download cable to a serial port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
164 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 167: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.8.3 Preparing a GeoExplorer II Data Collector for Data Transfer
The GeoExplorer II data collector does not have to be in Data Transfer mode in order to communicate with the office computer.
To prepare a GeoExplorer II data collector for data transfer:
1. Connect the data collector to the office computer.
2. Turn on the data collector.
3. Make sure that the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer II data collector is set to XMDM. To do this, from the main menu select Configuration / Communication / Port A, and set the following values:
Option Value
Protocol XMDM
Baud 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
4. Alternatively, from the main menu select Data Transfer. The GeoExplorer II data collector displays the file transfer status form.
Throughout the file transfer session the data collector will display status information on this form.
When data transfer between the data collector and the office computer is complete, press [Esc] on the GeoExplorer II data collector to exit Data Transfer mode.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 165
![Page 168: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.8.4 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer II Data Collector
Table 16.3 shows the data types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.3 File types you can transfer to or from a GeoExplorer II data collector
File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to
Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Data .ssf
Data dictionary .ddf
Waypoint .wpt
166 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 169: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.9 GeoExplorer Data CollectorUse the GIS data collector device type to connect to a GeoExplorer data collector.
16.9.1 Receiving an Almanac with a GeoExplorer Data Collector
You can tell if your GeoExplorer data collector has received a complete almanac file by switching it off. As the screen is counting down the time to shut down, the letter a is displayed at the bottom of the screen. An upper case A indicates that a complete almanac file was recorded; a lower case a indicates that a complete almanac file was not recorded.
The simplest way to get a current almanac file is to take your data collector outside and allow it to calculate positions. It will automatically acquire a new almanac file in about 45 minutes. You do not need to instruct the GeoExplorer data collector to record an almanac file.
16.9.2 Connecting a GeoExplorer Data Collector to Your Computer
The GeoExplorer data collector is connected to the office computer using the data download cable that is supplied with the data collector.
To connect a GeoExplorer data collector to the office computer:
1. Connect the small circular end of the data download cable to the back of the data collector.
2. Connect the other end of the data download cable to a serial port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 167
![Page 170: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.9.3 Preparing a GeoExplorer Data Collector for Data Transfer
The GeoExplorer data collector does not have to be in Data Transfer mode in order to communicate with the office computer but you can enter this mode if you so choose.
To prepare a GeoExplorer data collector for data transfer:
1. Connect the data collector to the office computer.
2. Turn on the data collector.
3. Make sure that the communication protocol of the GeoExplorer data collector is set to XMDM. To do this, from the main menu select Configuration / Communication / Port A, and set the following values:
Option Value
Protocol XMDM
Baud 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
4. Alternatively, from the main menu select Data Transfer. The GeoExplorer data collector displays the file transfer status form.
Throughout the file transfer session the data collector will display status information on this form.
When data transfer between the data collector and the office computer is complete, press [Esc] on the GeoExplorer data collectors exit Data Transfer mode.
168 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 171: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.9.4 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GeoExplorer Data Collector
Table 16.4 shows the data types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.4 File types you can transfer to or from a GeoExplorer data collector
File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to
Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Data .ssf
Data dictionary .ddf
Waypoint .wpt
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 169
![Page 172: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
16.10 GPS Pathfinder Basic Data CollectorUse the GIS data collector device type to connect to a GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector.
16.10.1 Connecting a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector to Your Computer
The GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector is connected to the office computer using the data cable that is supplied with the data collector system.
To connect a GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector to the office computer:
1. Connect the round 7-pin end of the data cable to the data port on the data collector.
2. Connect the data cable converter (part number 16637-00) to the 25-pin end of the data cable (part number 16844).
3. Connect the data cable and attached data cable converter to a serial port on the office computer.
If the office computer has a 9-pin serial port instead of a 25-pin serial port, attach the gray 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 16039) to other end of the data cable converter.
16.10.2 Preparing a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector for Data Transfer
In order to communicate with the office computer, the GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector must be set up for communication.
To prepare a GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector for data transfer:
1. Connect the data collector to the office computer.
2. Turn on the data collector.
170 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 173: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
Data Collectors 16
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
3. Make sure the GPS Pathfinder Basic's communication protocol is set to XMODM. To do this, turn the rotary knob to the Set Up position and click the Inc/Dec switch up once to enter the Comm screen. The screen should look as follows:
4. Make sure that the first two lines of the screen are as shown above. If not, change them by using the L/R switch to move over each field, and the Inc/Dec switch to change to the correct value.
16.10.3 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GPS Pathfinder Basic Data Collector
Table 16.5 shows the file types that are available for this transfer.
Table 16.5 File types you can transfer to or from a GPS Pathfinder Basic data collector
File Type Extensions Transfer from Transfer to
Almanac .ssf
Base data .ssf
Waypoint .wpt
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 171
![Page 174: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
16 Data Collectors
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
172 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 175: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
C H A P T E R
17
17 SoftwareIn this chapter:
■ Introduction
■ ASPEN software
■ TerraSync software
![Page 176: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
17 Software
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
17.1IntroductionThis chapter explains how to configure your field computer, running either the ASPEN or TerraSync software, to communicate with your office computer.
174 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 177: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
Software 17
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
17.2 ASPENThe ASPEN software can be installed on a computer and taken into the field.
Use the GIS data collector device type to connect to a field computer running ASPEN.
17.2.1 Connecting a Field Computer Running ASPEN to Your Computer
A field computer can be connected to the office computer using a data download cable.
To connect a field computer to the office computer:
1. Connect one end of the data download cable to the field computer. Connect the other end to a serial port on the office computer.
2. If the office computer has a 25-pin serial port instead of a 9-pin serial port, attach a 9-to-25-pin adaptor (part number 14283) to the office computer end of the cable.
Figure 17.1 Connection between the field computer and the office computer
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 175
![Page 178: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
17 Software
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
17.2.2 Preparing a Field Computer Running ASPEN for Data Transfer
In order to communicate with the office computer, the ASPEN software must be in Data Transfer mode.
To prepare a field computer running ASPEN for data transfer:
1. Connect the field computer to the office computer.
2. Start the ASPEN software and select File / Data Transfer. The Data Transfer dialog appears:
The Data Directory field always defaults to the current project directory in the ASPEN software. All other fields default to the directory that was last used to access files of that type on the field computer.
These directories must be set correctly as the Data Transfer utility will always store files in the directory specified on the field computer. Click Browse to change any directory.
176 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 179: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
Software 17
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
3. Click OK. The Data Transfer Status dialog appears:
This dialog shows the status of communications between the field and office computers.
The ASPEN software is now ready to send or receive files.
4. When data transfer between the ASPEN software and the office computer is complete, click Close to exit the Data Transfer Status dialog.
17.2.3 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Field Computer Running ASPEN
Table 17.1 shows the data types that are available for transfer between a field computer running the ASPEN software and your office computer.
Table 17.1 File types you can transfer to or from a field computer running ASPEN
File Type Extensions Transfer from ASPEN Transfer to ASPEN
Almanac .ssf
Background .dxf, .shp, .ssf, .cor, .phs, .bmp, .tif, .fbk
Base data .ssf, .cor, .phs
Coordinate system .cse������
version 2.08 or later
Data .ssf, .cor, .phs
Data dictionary .ddf
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 177
![Page 180: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
17 Software
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Geoid grid .ggf, .dgf, .mrp, pgf
Other files .*
Waypoint .wpt
Table 17.1 File types you can transfer to or from a field computer running ASPEN
File Type Extensions Transfer from ASPEN Transfer to ASPEN
178 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 181: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
Software 17
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
17.3 TerraSync softwareThe TerraSync software runs under the Windows CE operating system on the following CE devices:
• Palm PC (P/PC)
• Handheld PC (H/PC)
• Handheld PC Professional (H/PC Pro)
17.3.1 Connecting a CE Device To Your Computer
A CE device running the TerraSync software connects to your office PC using Microsoft's ActiveSync software. This connection may be via a serial cable, cradle, infrared, modem, or a network.
For help on connecting your CE device for data transfer, refer to the ActiveSync help or your CE device's documentation.
17.3.2 Preparing a CE Device Running Terrasync for Data Transfer
The Data Transfer utility transfers files directly to or from the memory of the CE device. You do not need to prepare the TerraSync software for data transfer. However, it is strongly recommended that you close the TerraSync program and any other programs that are running before you transfer files.
For help on preparing your CE device for data transfer, refer to the ActiveSync help or the documentation for your CE device.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 179
![Page 182: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
17 Software
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
17.3.3 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a CE Device Running the TerraSync Software
Table 17.2 shows the data types that are available for transfer between a CE device running the TerraSync software and your office computer.
Table 17.2 File types you can transfer to or from a CE device running TerraSync
File Type Extensions Transfer from TerraSync
Transfer to TerraSync
Almanac .ssf
Background .ssf, .cor, .phs, .bmp
Coordinate systems .cse
Coordinate system export .cse
Data .ssf
Data dictionary .ddf
Waypoint .wpt
180 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 183: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
C H A P T E R
18
18 GIS Devices and E-mailIn this chapter:
■ Introduction
■ GIS Folder
■ PC card from a GIS data collector
■ E-mail account
![Page 184: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
18 GIS Devices and E-mail
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
18.1IntroductionThis chapter explains how to set up a computer folder as a data transfer device, and how to transfer data by e-mail.
182 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 185: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
GIS Devices and E-mail 18
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
18.2 GIS FolderYou can set up any folder on your computer or network as a device in the Data Transfer utility. When you connect to a folder in the Data Transfer utility, the folder simulates the type of device it is associated with.
You can set up a folder to simulate the following data collectors or software:
• ASPEN
• Asset Surveyor version 4.x
• Asset Surveyor version 5.x
• TerraSync version 1.x
• GeoExplorer version 3.x
When you use a GIS folder as a device you can perform file conversions without copying files to or from a GIS data collector.
You do not have to prepare a folder for transfer, but you must ensure that you have read and write access to the folder.
Use the GIS folder device type to connect to a folder on your computer or network.
• Adding a device definition for a GIS folder
• File types you can transfer to or from a GIS folder
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 183
![Page 186: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
18 GIS Devices and E-mail
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
18.2.1 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GIS Folder
Table 18.1 shows the file types you can transfer depend on the data collector type you assign to the folder when you create its device definition. You can check or change the data collector type of a folder device in the Properties dialog.
Table 18.1 File types you can transfer to or from a GIS folder
Folder Type Can transfer the same file as
ASPEN ASPEN
Asset Surveyor 4.x or 5.x Asset Surveyor software
TerraSync v1.x TerraSync software
GeoExplorer 3 GeoExplorer 3 handheld
184 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 187: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
GIS Devices and E-mail 18
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
18.3 PC Card from a GIS Data CollectorOnce you have connected a PC card to your computer, it functions like a disk drive and does not have to be prepared for data transfer.
Use the GIS PC card device type to connect to a PC card from a GIS data collector.
• Adding a device definition for a GIS PC card
• Connecting a PC card to your computer
• File types you can transfer to or from a GIS PC card
18.3.1 Connecting a PC Card To Your Computer
For help on connecting a PC card device your computer, consult the documentation for the PCMCIA card.
18.3.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a GIS PC Card
The file types you can transfer depend on the data collector type you assign to the PC card when you create its device definition. You can check or change the data collector type of a PC card device in the Properties dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 185
![Page 188: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
18 GIS Devices and E-mail
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
18.4 E-Mail AccountThe TerraSync software can send and receive files by e-mail. This function lets you transfer files between the office and the field without the need to return to the office and connect the CE device to the office computer. To send and receive files by e-mail in the Data Transfer utility, you need to set up an E-mail device definition.
To define an E-mail device, you need to have an Internet connection and a user profile set up in one of the following MAPI-compliant e-mail applications:
• Microsoft Outlook
• Microsoft Outlook Express
• QUALCOMM Eudora
Note – Before you define an E-mail device, make sure that the e-mail application and any Internet software it requires are installed on your office computer, and that your user profile is configured correctly. The CE device(s) running the TerraSync software that you want to transfer files to or from should also be configured to send and receive e-mail using or an MAPI-compliant e-mail program, such as Microsoft Pocket Outlook, which is supplied with the Windows CE operating system.
The Data Transfer utility does not install or set up your Internet connection. It simply uses the Internet facilities built into Windows or Windows CE. It is your responsibility to set up Windows for your Internet connection.
Trimble is not responsible for setting up your Internet connection, or for solving any Internet problems that may occur.
For questions or support concerning your Internet connection, please contact your System Administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP).
186 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 189: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
GIS Devices and E-mail 18
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
The process of transferring files between the Data Transfer utility and a CE device running the TerraSync software is as follows:
1. Send a File from the Data Transfer utility.
2. To send a file, select the file in the Data Transfer utility as usual.
When you click Transfer All, the Data Transfer utility logs in to your e-mail application, using the user profile you have selected, creates an e-mail with the selected file as an attachment, and places the e-mail in the Outbox. The next time the Outbox is checked for outgoing messages, the e-mail is sent to the address that you specified in the E-mail device definition. If you did not specify a recipient in the E-mail device definition, you are prompted to enter an e-mail address when you send the file in the Data Transfer utility.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 187
![Page 190: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
18 GIS Devices and E-mail
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
3. Receive the File on the CE Device.
The TerraSync software checks the subject line of any new e-mails in Inbox on the CE device. If the subject line includes the agreed prefix, the e-mail is identified by the software as containing Trimble data files. When the user in the field uses the Receive via E-mail option in TerraSync's File Manager screen, all data files attached to e-mails with the required subject line are listed. The user can then select any file and transfer it to the appropriate folder on the CE device, ready for use in the TerraSync software.
4. Send a File from the CE Device.
The user in the field uses the Send via E-mail option in TerraSync's File Manager screen to select a file to send to the office computer. When they send the file, the TerraSync software logs in to the e-mail program, creates an e-mail with the selected file as an attachment, and places the e-mail in the Outbox.
The next time the Outbox is checked for outgoing messages, the e-mail is sent to the address that was specified in the TerraSync software.
5. Receive the File in the Data Transfer Utility.
The Data Transfer utility checks the subject line of any new e-mails in your e-mail application's Inbox. If the subject line includes the agreed prefix, the e-mail is identified by the software as containing Trimble data files. When you connect to the E-mail device and select files to receive, all data files attached to e-mails with the required subject line are listed. You can select any data file as usual and transfer it to your office computer by clicking Transfer All.
B Tip – You can use the Batch Processor utility to automatically detect when e-mails are received from a CE device running the TerraSync software and transfer the attached files to your office computer.
188 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 191: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
GIS Devices and E-mail 18
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
Use the GIS E-mail device type to connect to an e-mail account.
• Adding a device definition for an e-mail account
• File types you can transfer to or from an e-mail account
18.4.1 File Types You Can Transfer To or From an E-Mail Account
Table 18.2 shows the file types that are available for transfer between an e-mail account and your office computer.
Table 18.2 File types you can transfer to or from an e-mail account
File Type Extensions Transfer frome-mail account
Transfer toe-mail account
Background .dxf, .ssf, .cor, .bmp, .jpg
Data .ssf, .cor, .imp, .phs
Data dictionary .ddf
Waypoint .wpt
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 189
![Page 192: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
18 GIS Devices and E-mail
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
190 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 193: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
C H A P T E R
19
19 GPS ReceiversIn this chapter:
■ Introduction
■ 4600LS receiver
■ Series 4000 receiver
■ 4700 receiver
■ 4800 receiver
■ 4400 receiver
![Page 194: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
19 GPS Receivers
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
19.1IntroductionThis chapter explains how to configure survey-grade GPS receivers to communicate with your office computer, and how to use the Data Transfer utility with these receivers.
192 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 195: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
GPS Receivers 19
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
19.2 4600LS ReceiverThe 4600LS is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise surveying, positioning, and navigation.
It also has the ability to act as a standalone base station for Pathfinder GPS systems.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a 4600LS receiver.
19.2.1 Preparing a 4600LS Receiver for Data Transfer
Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set it up correctly.
To prepare a 4600LS receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the 4600LS receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.
19.2.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4600 Receiver
Table 19.1 shows the file types that are available for transfer between the 4600LS receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.1 File types you can transfer to or from a 4600 receiver
File Type ExtensionsTransfer from4600LS
Transfer to4600LS
Ephemeris .eph
Raw observations .dat
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 193
![Page 196: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
19 GPS Receivers
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
19.3 Series 4000 ReceiverThe Series 4000 is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise surveying, positioning, and navigation. It also has the ability to act as a standalone base station for Pathfinder GPS systems.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a Series 4000 receiver.
19.3.1 Preparing a Series 4000 Receiver for Data Transfer
Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set it up correctly.
To prepare a Series 4000 receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the Series 4000 receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.
19.3.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a Series 4000 Receiver
Table 19.2 shows the file types that are available for transfer between the Series 4000 receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.2 File types you can transfer to or from a Series 4000 receiver
File Type ExtensionsTransfer fromSeries 4000
Transfer toSeries 4000
Ephemeris .eph
Raw observations .dat
Station/session table .tab
194 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 197: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
GPS Receivers 19
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
19.4 4700 ReceiverThe 4700 receiver is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise surveying, positioning, and navigation. It also has the ability to act as a standalone base station for Pathfinder GPS systems.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a 4700 receiver.
19.4.1 Preparing a 4700 Receiver for Data Transfer
Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set it up correctly.
To prepare a 4700 receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the 4700 receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.
19.4.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4700 Receiver
Table 19.3 shows the file types that are available for transfer between the 4700 receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.3 File types you can transfer to or from a 4700 receiver
File Type ExtensionsTransfer from4700 Receiver
Transfer to4700 Receiver
Ephemeris .eph
Raw observations .dat
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 195
![Page 198: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
19 GPS Receivers
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
19.5 4800 ReceiverThe 4800 receiver is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise surveying, positioning, and navigation. It also has the ability to act as a standalone base station for Pathfinder GPS systems.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a 4800 receiver.
19.5.1 Preparing a 4800 Receiver for Data Transfer
Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set it up correctly.
To prepare a 4800 receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the 4800 receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.
19.5.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4800 Receiver
Table 19.4 shows the file types that are available for transfer between the 4800 receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.4 File types you can transfer to or from a 4800 receiver
File Type ExtensionsTransfer from4800 Receiver
Transfer to4800 Receiver
Ephemeris .eph
Raw observations .dat
196 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 199: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
GPS Receivers 19
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
19.6 4400 ReceiverThe 4400 receiver is a survey-grade GPS receiver designed for precise surveying, positioning, and navigation.
Use the GPS Receiver (4000 Series) device type to connect to a 4400 receiver.
19.6.1 Preparing a 4400 Receiver for Data Transfer
Before transferring data, you need to configure the equipment and set it up correctly.
To prepare a 4400 receiver for data transfer:
1. Connect the 4400 receiver to the office computer.
2. Turn on the receiver.
19.6.2 File Types You Can Transfer To or From a 4400 Receiver
Table 19.5 shows the file types that are available for transfer between the 4400 receiver and your office computer.
Table 19.5 File types you can transfer to or from a 4400 receiver
File Type ExtensionsTransfer from4400
Transfer to4400
Ephemeris .eph
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 197
![Page 200: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
19 GPS Receivers
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
198 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 201: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
C H A P T E R
20
20 Types of FilesIn this chapter:
■ Introduction
■ Almanac files
■ Background files
■ Base data files
■ Configuration (.ccf) files
■ Coordinate System (.cse, .dat) export files
■ Coordinate Systems
■ Data Dictionary (.ddf) files
■ Ephemeris (.eph) files
■ Geoid grid files
■ GIS data files
■ Help (.hlp) files
■ Language (.lng) files
■ Other files
■ Raw observations (.dat files)
■ Station/session tables (.tab files)
■ Waypoint (.wpt) files
![Page 202: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.1IntroductionThe types of files you can transfer to or from GIS devices are listed below.
• Almanac files
• Background files
• Base data files
• Configuration files (.ccf) files
• Coordinate systems
• Coordinate system export (.cse) files
• Data dictionary (.ddf) files
• Ephemeris (.eph) files
• Geoid grid files
• GIS data files
• Help (.hlp) files
• Language (.lng) files
• Other files
• Raw observations (.dat files)
• Station/session tables (.tab files)
• Waypoint (.wpt) files
200 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 203: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.2Almanac FilesAn almanac file contains time and position information for GPS satellites. A current almanac can be used to plan future data collection sessions, using the Quick Plan utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software.
20.2.1 Devices You Can Transfer Almanac Files From
Table 20.1 shows the devices that you can transfer almanac files from.
Table 20.1 Devices you can transfer almanac files from
Device FilenameTransfer almanacfiles from
Transfer almanacfiles to
CE device running the TerraSync software
*.ssf
Field computer running the ASPEN software
*.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
Data Collector running the Asset Surveyor software
*.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
GeoExplorer 3 *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
GeoExplorer II *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
GeoExplorer *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
Pathfinder Basic *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 201
![Page 204: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.3 Background FilesA background file may be a file of GIS data, for example features collected in the same area in a previous session, a file of information from a GIS database, or an image file.
20.3.1 Devices You Can Transfer Background Files To or From
Table 20.2 shows the devices that you can transfer background files to or from.
To transfer a background file from a data collector running the Asset Surveyor software to your PC, transfer it as a normal data (.ssf) file.
Table 20.2 Devices you can transfer background files to or from
Device Filename
Transfer background files from
Transfer background files to
CE device running the TerraSync software
*.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs, *.bmp, *.jpg
Field computer running the ASPEN software
*.dxf, *.shp, *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs, *.bmp, *.tif, *.fbk
Data Collector running the Asset Surveyor software
*.ssf
E-mail account *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.bmp
GeoExplorer II *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
GeoExplorer *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
Pathfinder Basic *.eph, *.ssf, *.txt
202 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 205: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.4Base Data FilesA base station records GPS positions at a stationary location. The base data recorded at a base station is used to increase the accuracy of data recorded by roving receivers.
20.4.1 Devices You Can Transfer Base Data Files To or From
Table 20.3 shows the devices that you can transfer base data files to or from.
Table 20.3 Devices you can transfer base data files to or from
Device FilenameTransfer base data files from
Transfer base data files to
Field computer running the ASPEN software
*.ssf
Data Collector running Asset Surveyor version 5 or later
*.ssf
GeoExplorer 3 *.ssf
GeoExplorer II *.ssf
GeoExplorer *.ssf
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 203
![Page 206: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.5Configuration (.ccf) FilesYou can use the Configuration Manager utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software to create configuration files for GeoExplorer 3 data collector. The configuration of GeoExplorer 3 handheld determines how data is collected, entered, displayed, and communicated with external devices. A configuration file determines default settings to control these parameters and can be used to lock some settings.
For more information on defining configuration files see the Configuration Manager Help.
20.5.1 Devices You Can Transfer Configuration Files To
Table 20.4 shows the devices that you can transfer configuration files to.
Table 20.4 Devices you can transfer configuration files to
Device FilenameTransfer configuration files from
Transfer configuration files to
GeoExplorer 3 *.ccf
204 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 207: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.6Coordinate System (.cse, .dat) Export FilesTo send a coordinate system, or a set of coordinate systems, to a data collector, you must first generate a .cse file in the Coordinate System Manager. For more information see the Coordinate System Manager Help.
If the .cse file selected for transfer references any additional file (such as a datum or projection file) the Associated Files dialog will appear when Transfer All is clicked. This dialog gives you the option of not sending any large files which may not be necessary on the data collector.
B Tip – You can also send a single coordinate system to a CE device running the TerraSync software. The coordinate system you send overwrites all existing coordinate systems in the TerraSync software. It is strongly recommended that you send a coordinate system export file instead of a coordinate system.
Note – Instead of .cse files, the TerraSync software uses coordinate system export files with a .csw extension. When you export a coordinate system from the Coordinate System Manager utility, both the .cse and .csw files are exported. To transfer a coordinate system export file to a CE device running the TerraSync software, simply select the appropriate .cse file as usual. The corresponding .csw file is sent to the CE device.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 205
![Page 208: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.6.1 Devices You Can Transfer Coordinate System Export Files To or From
Table 20.5 shows the devices that you can transfer coordinate system export files to or from.
Table 20.5 Devices you can transfer coordinate system export files to or from
Device Filename
Transfer coordinate system export files from
Transfer coordinate system export files to
CE device running the TerraSync software
�����
Field computer running ASPEN version 2.08 or later
�����
TSC1 data collector running Asset Surveyor version 4 or later
�����
GeoExplorer 3 �����
TDC1, TDC2, or MC-V data collector running the Asset Surveyor software
���������
206 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 209: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.7Coordinate SystemsYou can send a single coordinate system to a CE device running the TerraSync software. You do not have to prepare a Coordinate System Export (.cse) file. Instead you select the site, or coordinate system, zone, and datum, at the time of transfer.
C Warning – When you transfer a single coordinate system, it overwrites any coordinate systems already loaded in the TerraSync software. If you want to use more than one coordinate system, create a .cse file containing all the systems you will use and transfer the .cse file instead.
Devices you can transfer coordinate systems to or from
Table 20.6 shows the devices that you can transfer coordinate systems to or from.
Table 20.6 Devices you can transfer coordinate systems to or from
Device Filename
Transfer coordinate systems from
Transfer coordinate systems to
CE device running the TerraSync software
*.cse
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 207
![Page 210: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.8Data Dictionary (.ddf) FilesA data dictionary describes the features and attributes relevant to a particular project or job. It is used in the field to control the collection of features (objects) and attributes (information about those objects).
Use the Data Dictionary Editor utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software to create and edit .ddf files.
Note – You can only store one data dictionary on a GeoExplorer or GeoExplorer II data collector. When you transfer a new data dictionary it automatically overwrites the existing data dictionary, provided there are no data files on the data collector that use the existing data dictionary. Before transferring a new data dictionary to a GeoExplorer or GeoExplorer II, delete all rover files on the data collector, or transfer them to your PC.
20.8.1 Devices You Can Transfer Data Dictionary Files To or From
Table 20.7 shows the devices that you can transfer data dictionary files to or from.
Table 20.7 Devices you can transfer data dictionary files to or from
Device Filename
Transfer data dictionary files from
Transfer data dictionary files to
CE device running the TerraSync software
*.ddf
Field computer running the ASPEN software
*.ddf
GeoExplorer *.ddf
Data Collector running the Asset Surveyor software
*.ddf
GeoExplorer II *.ddf
GeoExplorer 3 *.ddf
E-mail account *.ddf
208 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 211: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.9Ephemeris (.eph) FilesEphemeris files contain information on the exact location and health of GPS satellites. They can be transferred from GPS receivers.
20.9.1 Devices You Can Transfer Ephemeris Files To or From
Table 20.8 shows the devices that you can transfer ephemeris files to or from.
Table 20.8 Devices you can transfer ephemeris files to or from
Device Filename
Transfer ephemeris files from
Transfer ephemeris files to
4600LS receiver �����
4700 receiver �����
4800 receiver �����
Series 4000 receiver �����
4400 receiver �����
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 209
![Page 212: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.10Geoid Grid FilesA geoid model is a mathematical definition of the difference between WGS-84 Height and local height above mean sea level (MSL). It defines the mean sea level over a local area. A geoid grid model is a file that contains these differences for a number of positions on a grid. Using interpolation, the difference between the WGS-84 Height and local height above MSL can be calculated for any point that falls within the extents of that grid.
20.10.1 Devices You Can Transfer Geoid Grid Files To
Table 20.9 shows the devices that you can transfer geoid grid files to.
Table 20.9 Devices you can transfer geoid grid files to
Device FilenameTransfer geoid grid files from
Transfer geoid grid files to
Field computer running the ASPEN software
�����������������
�����
Data Collector running Asset Surveyor version 4 or later
�����������������
�����
GeoExplorer 3 �����������������
�����
210 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 213: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.11GIS Data FilesGIS data files typically contain GPS positions, along with feature and attribute information. They are stored in the SSF format. Normally the filename extension is .ssf, but data files can also be given other extensions to indicate that they have been imported from a GIS (.imp), differentially corrected (.cor), or phase processed (.phs).
SSF files can be exported from the GPS Pathfinder Office software to a Geographical Information System (GIS) in a variety of file formats.
SSF files can be transferred to and from some GIS data collectors, GIS folders, and GIS PC cards.
Version 1.20 of the TerraSync software supports data files that include Filename attributes. A Filename attribute lets you specify a file, such as a sound or image file, to attach to the feature. If any data file that you transfer has files attached to it, these attached files are transferred with the data file.
20.11.1 Devices You Can Transfer GIS Data Files To or From
Table 20.10 shows the devices that you can transfer GIS data files to or from.
Table 20.10 Devices you can transfer GIS data files to or from
Device FilenameTransfer GISdata files from
Transfer GIS data files to
CE device running the TerraSync software
*.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
Field computer running the ASPEN software
*.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
Data Collector running Asset Surveyor version 5 or later
*.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
GeoExplorer 3 *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 211
![Page 214: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
GeoExplorer II *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
GeoExplorer *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
������� *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
GIS PC card *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
Pathfinder Basic *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
E-mail account *.ssf, *.cor, *.imp, *.phs
Table 20.10 Devices you can transfer GIS data files to or from (Continued)
Device FilenameTransfer GISdata files from
Transfer GIS data files to
212 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 215: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.12Help (.hlp) FilesHelp files contain help text which can be displayed on a data collector.
20.12.1 Devices You Can Transfer Help Files To
Table 20.11 shows the devices that you can transfer help files to.
Table 20.11 Devices you can transfer help files to
Device FilenameTransfer help files from
Transfer help files to
TSC1 data collector running the Asset Surveyor software
*.hlp
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 213
![Page 216: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.13Language (.lng) FilesLanguage files contain translated text for messages, menus, and commands for Trimble mapping or survey software.
20.13.1 Devices You Can Transfer Language Files To
Table 20.12 shows the devices that you can transfer language files to.
Table 20.12 Devices you can transfer language files to
Device Filename
Transfer language files from
Transfer language filesto
Data Collector running the Asset Surveyor software
*.lng
GeoExplorer 3 *.lng
214 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 217: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.14Other FilesSome devices can send or receive miscellaneous files. These files are transferred as Other files.
20.14.1 Devices You Can Transfer Other Files To or From
Table 20.13 shows the devices that you can transfer other files to or from.
Table 20.13 Devices you can transfer other files to or from
Device FilenameTransfer other files from
Transfer other files to
CE device running the TerraSync software
*.*
Field computer running the ASPEN software
*.*
TSC1 data collector running the Asset Surveyor software
satDGPS.ini
TDC1 data collector running the Asset Surveyor software
barcode drivers
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 215
![Page 218: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.15Raw Observations (.dat files)Raw observations are files of GPS position information recorded by a GPS receiver. They can be transferred from GPS receivers, or can be copied from the receiver to a device running the Trimble Survey Controller software and transferred as copied receiver files.
20.15.1 Devices You Can Transfer Raw Observations To or From
Table 20.14 shows the devices that you can transfer raw observations (.dat files) to or from. When the files have been copied to a device running the Trimble Survey Controller software, they are listed as copied receiver files.
Table 20.14 Devices you can transfer raw observations to or from
Device FilenameTransfer raw observations from
Transfer raw observations to
4600LS receiver *.dat
4700 receiver *.dat
4800 receiver *.dat
Series 4000 receiver *.dat
Data card from a survey data collector
*.dat
216 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 219: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
Types of Files 20
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.16Station/Session Tables (.tab files)A station/session table describes one or more stations (locations where a receiver is set up to make observations for a static survey) and, for each station, one or more sessions (periods of observation at that station).
Once you have created a table, you send it to the GPS receiver. You can then run the GPS receiver unattended—the table controls the receiver so that observation sessions start and stop automatically.
A single station/session table usually contains definitions for all stations in a project, regardless of how many receivers are being used. When a receiver is set up at a site, it is programmed to use the station that represents that site. Stations intended for use by other receivers are never used.
20.16.1 Devices You Can Transfer Station/Session Tables To or From
Table 20.15 shows the devices that you can transfer station/session tables to or from.
Table 20.15 Devices you can transfer station/session tables to or from
Device Filename
Transfer station/session tables from
Transfer station/session tables to
Series 4000 receiver *.tab
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 217
![Page 220: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
20 Types of Files
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
20.17 Waypoint (.wpt) FilesA waypoint is a position that you use as a reference point or marker. A waypoint can be your base camp, a field site, a peg, or any other significant point you want to navigate to or from, or use to orient yourself.
20.17.1 Devices You Can Transfer Waypoint Files To or From
Table 20.16 shows the devices that you can transfer waypoint files to or from.
Table 20.16 Devices you can transfer waypoint files to or from
Device FilenameTransfer raw observations from
Transfer raw observations to
CE device running the TerraSync software
*.wpt
Field computer running the ASPEN software
*.wpt
Data Collector running the Asset Surveyor software
*.wpt
GeoExplorer 3 *.wpt
GeoExplorer II *.wpt
GeoExplorer *.wpt
Pathfinder Basic *.wpt
E-mail account *.wpt
218 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 221: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
C H A P T E R
21
21 TroubleshootingIn this chapter:
■ Introduction
■ Trimble diagnostic report
![Page 222: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
21 Troubleshooting
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
21.1IntroductionProblems you may encounter when using the Data Transfer utility fall into two main categories:
• difficulty establishing communication with a device
• difficulty transferring files to and from the device
Table 21.1 Communication Problems
������� ���� ��������
Data Transfer cannot connect to a device.
The cabling between the device and the office computer is not connected correctly.
Consult the relevant connection topic, or the documentation for your device, for cabling instructions specific to your device.
The device is not ready for transfer.
Some devices must be in a particular mode to communicate with the Data Transfer utility.
The COM port on the device is set incorrectly.
Consult the appropriate section of the device's documentation for the recommended COM port settings.
The COM port in the Data Transfer utility is set incorrectly.
Check that you have the device's cable connected to the correct serial port, and that the device properties specify the correct port. If you are not sure what the serial port you are using is called, try connecting to each port in turn until you are successful.
Data Transfer cannot transfer files.
Give the file a different name or delete the file on the device and try again.
You are trying to transfer a file to a folder that you do not have write access to.
You are trying to send a file to a device when a file of that name already exists on the device.
Select a different destination folder or see your network administrator to change your rights to that drive.
The selected destination folder is full.
Delete any unwanted files in the destination folder or select a different folder.
The device has run out of memory.
Delete any unwanted data dictionaries or data files on the device.
220 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 223: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
Troubleshooting 21
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
There are too many applications running simultaneously with the Data Transfer utility.
Close one or more of these applications.
The device has powered down midway through a transfer operation.
Check the battery and cabling. Replace or recharge the battery if necessary, or connect to an external power source.
You are trying to send a data dictionary to a GeoExplorer or GeoExplorer II when data files that use the existing data dictionary are still present on the data collector.
Only one data dictionary can be stored on these data collectors, so when you send a data dictionary it overwrites the existing one.
Delete the data files on the GeoExplorer or GeoExplorer II that are using the data dictionary, or transfer these files to your office PC. You can now overwrite the data dictionary.
Table 21.1 Communication Problems (Continued)
������� ���� ��������
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 221
![Page 224: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
21 Troubleshooting
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
21.2Trimble Diagnostic ReportIf the troubleshooting solutions do not fix your problem, you may need to contact Trimble Support. You will be asked to send a diagnostic report, which details the settings on your computer and the software and files that you have installed that may affect Data Transfer's operation.
To generate the diagnostic report:
1. From the Trimble folder on the Start menu, choose Trimble Diagnostics.
The Trimble Diagnostic Report progress dialog appears while your computer is scanned. When the scan is complete, the diagnostic report appears in the Trimble Diagnostic Report window.
2. By default, only the standard report options are selected. If required, select Options / Detailed to generate a detailed report.
3. Select an output method:
– To print the report, select File / Print.
– To save the report as a text file, select File / Save As. Enter a filename in the Save As dialog, browse for a folder if necessary, and click Save.
– To e-mail the report to Trimble Support, select File / Send. A new message is opened in your default e-mail editor, with the Trimble Support address filled in the To field and the diagnostic report already attached. Enter a subject line and any details and send the e-mail message.
4. Select File / Exit to close the Trimble Diagnostic Report window.
222 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 225: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
Troubleshooting 21
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
21.2.1 Connecting To Devices
Select a device from the following list to view connection information for that device.
For information on a device that is not listed here, refer to the documentation for the device.
Asset Surveyor running on a:
• MC-V data collector
• TSC1 data collector
• TDC1 data collector
• TDC2 data collector
• CE device running TerraSync
• GeoExplorer 3 data collector
• GeoExplorer II data collector
• GeoExplorer data collector
• Field computer running ASPEN
• Pathfinder Basic data collector
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 223
![Page 226: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
21 Troubleshooting
Dat
a Tr
ansf
er
224 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 227: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
C H A P T E R
22
22 The Differential Correction UtilityIn this chapter:■ Introduction
■ Differential GPS
■ Using Differential Correction
■ User Interface
■ Internet Search
■ Troubleshooting
![Page 228: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Introduction
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.1IntroductionThe Differential Correction utility is produced by Trimble Navigation Limited for differentially correcting GPS field data. It runs under Windows 95, Windows NT version 4 and higher, Windows 2000 and Windows ME.
The Differential Correction Utility enables you to remove errors in GPS data caused various factors. It improves the accuracy of GPS positions from approximately 100 meters to between submeter and five meters, depending on the receiver and data collection technique used.
226 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 229: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.2Differential GPSDifferential GPS is a data collection technique that uses an extra GPS receiver and some complex calculations to increase the accuracy of GPS positions. It is based on the fact that any pseudorange errors in a GPS signal are common to all receivers within a radius of several hundred miles. Differential GPS can provide accuracies from submeter to around five meters. Without differential correction accuracy may only be within 100 meters CEP.
The extra receiver, known as the base station, is placed on a known reference position. It receives GPS data from all satellites in view. One or more rover receivers collect GPS data at unknown locations using some of the same satellites that the base is receiving data from.
Differential correction then compares the base station data with the known base station location and computes the error associated with each satellite pseudorange. This error is used to correct the rover positions, improving their accuracy.
Differential GPS corrections can be applied at the time the data is being collected in the field (real-time differential GPS using radios). Differential corrections can also be applied in the office once the rover and base station files are transferred to your office computer. This is called postprocessed differential correction and is carried out by the Differential Correction utility.
22.2.1 Factors Affecting Accuracy
It is necessary to differentially correct your rover files to obtain the specified accuracy for your receiver. There are many reasons why the accuracy of your data may be degraded, some of which are described in the following sections.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 227
![Page 230: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Multipath
GPS satellite signals can sometimes be reflected off larger nearby objects, such as buildings or cars, causing an erroneous signal to be received by the GPS antenna. This phenomenon is known as “multipath”. Severe multipath can induce errors of dozens of meters, while mild multipath can cause small errors of only a meter or less. You can obtain optimal accuracy by collecting data in an environment devoid of large reflective surfaces and with a clear view of the sky.
Number of Visible Satellites
A minimum number of satellites (usually four) is needed to calculate an accurate position. If you have five or more satellites, this increases the accuracy by only a small amount. You can obtain positions from three satellites using 2D position mode, but this significantly reduces the accuracy. To obtain the best possible accuracy, set the Position mode on your data collector to Overdetermined—this makes sure that at least five satellites are used.
Distance Between Base Station and Roving Receiver
Differential correction accuracy degrades as the distance between the base station and the rover increases. An estimate of this degradation is two parts per million (ppm). For example, 2 mm of degradation occurs for every kilometer between the base and the rover.
If you code process your data with the Differential Correction utility, you should only collect data within 500 kilometers (approximately 310 miles) of your base station.
If you carrier phase process your data with the Differential Correction utility, you should only collect data within 50 kilometers (approximately 31 miles) of your base station.
Note – The Centimeter Process option will only calculate a fixed solution if the distance between the base and rover is less than 10 kilometers (approximately 6 miles).
228 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 231: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
PDOP
Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) is a measure of the current satellite geometry. The lower the PDOP value, the more accurate the GPS positions. You can configure the PDOP mask on your data collector to make sure that only data of the required accuracy is collected. If the PDOP exceeds the configured mask the data collector stops logging positions. The recommended PDOP mask is six. If you use a Pro XL™, Pro XR™, Pro XRS™ or Series 4000 receiver, a PDOP mask of four is recommended for submeter accuracy.
SNR
Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is a measure of the strength of the satellite signal relative to the background noise. Accuracy degrades as the signal strength decreases. You can configure the SNR mask on your data collector to log only GPS positions below a certain SNR value. The recommended SNR mask is 6.
Note – PDOP and SNR act in opposite directions: greater accuracy is achieved with low PDOP and high SNR.
Satellite Elevations
When a satellite is low on the horizon, the satellite signals must travel a greater distance through the atmosphere, resulting in a lower signal strength and delayed reception by the GPS receiver. Low-elevation satellites tend to yield noisy data. Position data should be collected using only satellites that are at least 15º above the horizon. You can configure the elevation mask on your data collector to ignore satellites that are low in the sky. The recommended elevation mask is 15º.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 229
![Page 232: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Occupation Period
The Pathfinder Basic Series, GeoExplorer I and II, GeoExplorer 3™, ProLite™, Professional™ and Pathfinder Card™ receivers give five-meter accuracy with a one second occupation time. An accuracy of two meters can be achieved by averaging positions over a period of about three minutes (180 positions at a logging interval of one second).
The GeoExplorer 3 data collector gives two-meter accuracy with a one second occupation time.
The Pathfinder ProXL, ProXR, ProXRS, and Series 4000 receivers achieve submeter accuracy with a one second occupation time. This accuracy does not improve significantly over a longer occupation time.
22.2.2 Obtaining Optimal Accuracy
In addition to these factors, certain conditions must be met to make sure that your differential correction produces the most accurate positions possible. The Differential Correction utility outputs this accuracy information in the form of precision estimates.
Synchronized Measurements
To obtain optimal accuracy from differential correction, the base station must record synchronized measurement data (synced measurements). Synchronized measurements occur when the base receivers record GPS pseudorange measurements on the GPS integer second.
Synchronized measurements can be recorded by the following compatible base stations:
• a 12-channel Maxwell-based Community Base Station (CBS) when logging rate is set to base measurements
• a 12-channel ProXL, ProSR or ProXRS system, when connected to a data collector running the Asset Surveyor software in Base Station mode
230 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 233: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
• a 12-channel 4600LS Surveyor, when connected to a data collector running the Asset Surveyor software in Base Station mode
• a Trimble Maxwell-based Series 4000 or 4400 receiver. The 4000SSE™ and the following 4000SE™ receivers are Maxwell-based:
Land Surveyor II™Land Surveyor IID™System Surveyor II™Geodetic Surveyor™Geodetic System Surveyor™GIS Surveyor Base Station™ (with carrier-phase recording option)
B Tip – To determine if you are using a Maxwell-based receiver click Status, then Options. This allows you to view Receiver Configuration. Click More until Model is visible. If your receiver is not listed above, contact your local Trimble dealer to learn about upgrade options.
• a GeoExplorer data collector and GeoExplorer II data collector in High Accuracy Base mode.
All other Pathfinder GPS receivers used as base stations do not record synchronized measurements.
Logging Intervals
The optimum base and rover logging interval is five seconds. It is recommended that you do not use an interval greater than 15 seconds. The Differential Correction utility rejects any file with an interval greater than 30 seconds.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 231
![Page 234: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Precision Estimates
The Differential Correction utility outputs accuracy information for each GPS position that is successfully differentially corrected. Several pieces of information are generated.
Positional Errors These errors are generated by the Differential Correction utility for each position’s north, east and altitude components. The information is displayed in terms of the standard error for each component of the three dimensional position. Figure 22.1 illustrates each component of the positional error.
Figure 22.1 Positional error diagram
232 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 235: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Error Ellipse The error ellipse values generated by the Differential Correction utility provide two-dimensional information with regard to the relative orientation of the satellites. The error ellipse values identify a major and minor axis, and the orientation of the major axis (or deviation of the major axis from true north. Figure 22.2 illustrates the components of the error ellipse:
Figure 22.2 Error ellipse
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 233
![Page 236: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Confidence Level The Differential Correction utility outputs a confidence level for each GPS position. The statistical level of confidence generated for each position can be 68% (1s), 95% (2s), or 99% (3s). This is configured in the GPS Pathfinder Office software’s Options / Units dialog.
The confidence level, or probability, and the actual precision estimate have an inverse relationship. That is, for a given position, the larger the probability the smaller the estimate and vice versa. For example, for a single GPS position, you might have a 99% probability that the position is within 2 meters of truth. However, for the same position, you could have a 68% probability that the position is within 0.6 meters of truth.
Factors which can influence the accuracy of precision estimates include the type of receiver you use, the distance between the base and rover receivers, distance between base station and roving receiver, position dilution of precision (PDOP), and reference variances produced during carrier phase processing.
234 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 237: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.2.3 Base Files
In order to use a base station for differential correction you must record the data into one or more base files. Base files must meet the following criteria:
• The base files must cover the same time period as the rover file(s).
• The base files must collect data from all satellites that the rover(s) used for position computation. To make sure that the satellites used by the rover are a subset of the satellites used by the base, the base station must have a clear view of the sky and a lower elevation mask than the rover. The rover should be limited to working within 500 kilometers (approximately 310 miles) of a base station to avoid satellite tracking mismatches between base and rovers.
Note – If you want to carrier phase process your data in the Differential Correction utility, the distance between your base and rovers should be no greater than 50 kilometers (approximately 31 miles). In addition, the Centimeter Processing option will only calculate a fixed solution if the distance between you base and rovers is less than 10 kilometers (approximately 6 miles).
• The base file logging intervals must be set correctly. The satellite measurements in each base file must be continuous and at an interval no greater than one set of measurements every 30 seconds.
• You must know the reference position where the base file(s) was collected. If you use more than one base file in a session, each file must have been collected at the same reference position. Public data sources such as Community Base Stations normally have the correct reference position set in the header of the base files.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 235
![Page 238: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
• All base files must be in the same format. The Trimble SSF and DAT formats and the RINEX format are supported. Compressed SSF, DAT or RINEX base files, with a .zip, .exe, or .gz extension are also supported.
If your base files meet these conditions then you can differentially correct your data files using the Differential Correction utility.
22.2.4 Centimeter Processing Options
If you have purchased the GPS Pathfinder Office Centimeter Processing option, it is possible to achieve higher levels of accuracy with the Differential Correction utility. This option works with the carrier phase processing option in the Differential Correction utility, to better process your data.
For data to be processed using the Centimeter Processing option it must satisfy the following requirements:
• Features must be collected within a continuous carrier block of at least 45 minutes duration
• The base line (distance between the base and rover) for the data must be less than 10 kilometers
• Data must be collected using a GPS Pathfinder ProXR or ProXRS receiver
In order to get the best possible precision it is also important to make sure that your base station reference position is accurate, and that the coordinate system and zone used for displaying and entering coordinates is correct. In addition, the antenna height in the rover file must be correctly entered (including the antenna type), and the antenna must be kept very stable while logging data.
Positions corrected using the Centimeter Processing option are reported as Fixed solutions in the Differential Correction summary window.
236 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 239: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Differential GPS 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
For more information on carrier phase data collection and the Centimeter Processing option, please refer to the Asset Surveyor or ASPEN Operation Manual.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 237
![Page 240: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.3Using Differential CorrectionThis section explains how to carry out basic tasks using the Differential Correction utility. For information on specific dialogs and controls see User Interface, page 251. For general information on how to use the Differential Correction windows and dialogs, see Basics of Operation in the GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide.
Note – Make differential correction the first step that you perform after transferring the data from the field data collector to the office computer. If you want to display, edit, combine, or otherwise manipulate data files, do so after they are differentially corrected.
22.3.1 Starting Differential Correction
Before you can start the Differential Correction utility, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the Differential Correction utility from within the GPS Pathfinder Office software, or start it directly from Windows.
To start Differential Correction from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Differential Correction from the menu bar.
To start the Differential Correction utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Differential Correction from the menu.
238 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 241: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The main Differential Correction window appears:
22.3.2 Selecting Rover Files
By default, the last-used set of files are selected as rover files. They appear in the Selected Files list. For example, if you just downloaded a set of data files using the Data Transfer utility, these files would be selected. If these are the files you want to correct, simply go to the next step. If not, you need to change the list.
Note – The files should not span more than seven days (from the earliest selected file to the latest selected file).
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 239
![Page 242: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
To change the list of selected input files:
1. Click Browse in the Rover Files group. The Select Rover Files dialog appears:
2. Replace or modify the list of input files and click Open.
22.3.3 Selecting Base Files
The next step is to select the base files to be used to process the selected rover files. You can do this automatically or manually. All selected files must be in the same format (that is: SSF, DAT, RNX, ZIP, EXE, or GZ).
Note – Compressed base files cannot be decompressed if the folder they reside in is 'read-only'. Make sure that you have full access privileges to the folder that your base files reside in.
The three ways to select base files are described in the following sections.
• Using Local Search
• Using Internet Search • Using Browse
240 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 243: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Using Local Search
To automatically select base files from a local folder:
1. Click Local Search. The Local Search for Base Files dialog appears:
2. The Folder field displays the folder that will be searched for base files. By default, it points to the base file folder of the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder. Click Browse if you need to change it.
The Preferred Base File Prefix field allows you to specify a one or two character prefix included in the base file name (for example b) to speed the search for Base files.
The Maximum Base File Span field allows you to enter the maximum number of hours that each base file covers.
For more details see Local Search for Base Files Dialog, page 258.
3. Once you have selected the base file folder and altered any necessary fields, click Search to initiate the search.
When the search is complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files, page 245 dialog appears.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 241
![Page 244: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Using Internet Search
To automatically select base files from a Web address:
1. Click Internet Search. The Internet Search dialog appears:
Note – This dialog only appears if a base station provider has been previously configured. For more information on configuring a base station provider from the Internet, see Internet Search, page 286.
The Base Data Provider field provides a drop-down list of names of Web page owners from which base data can be retrieved. Click Properties to see more details on the base data provider.
B Tip – If your base data provider is not listed, click New to add a new provider. See New Base Station Provider Click New to select a new base station provider, the following dialog appears:, page 261. for details on adding a new base station provider.
2. Select your preferred base data provider from the drop-down list and click OK.
242 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 245: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The Confirm Internet Setup dialog appears:
3. Click Yes to continue.
The Copying Files from Internet dialog appears:
This dialog shows the files names being searched for and the status of the download operation. When the download operation is complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears. For more information, see page 245.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 243
![Page 246: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Using Browse
To manually select base files:
1. Click Browse in the Base Files group. The Select Base Files dialog appears:
2. Select the appropriate base files and click Open.
When the files are open, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears. For more information, see page 245.
244 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 247: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.3.4 Confirm Selected Base Files
The Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears when base files have been selected using Local Search, Internet Search, or Browse in the Differential Correction main window.
There are five columns in the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog:
C Warning – If a rover file is not fully covered by the base file(s), positions outside the coverage will not be differentially corrected.
Column Displays
Rover Files the rover files that were selected
Coverage Full, Partial, or None. This indicates how much of each rover file is covered by the selected base file(s).
Base File the base file(s) that were found
Start Time the start times for both the rover and base files
End Time the end times for both the rover and base files
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 245
![Page 248: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Note – There is a problem with velocity records in ASPEN version 1.11. The header of the data file will be incorrect if velocity records are logged before the first position. This may cause the Differential Correction utility to auto-select base files that do not cover all velocity records. To overcome this problem, manually select all required base files.
Click OK to accept the base file(s) that are open, or Cancel to return to the main window and select other base files.
22.3.5 Specifying the Reference Position
It is essential for good differential correction that the known reference position is accurate. When you click OK in the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog, the Reference Position dialog appears so that you can check the reference position and the height of the base station antenna:
Note – If a previous differential correction session used base files that have the same reference position as the one(s) currently selected, and the Reference Confirmation field has been set to Not Required if Identical to Previous Session, this dialog does not appear.
246 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 249: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
If necessary, simply edit the fields. Alternatively, you can select the reference position from a different base file that contains correct reference position coordinates. If you want to view the coordinates in a different coordinate system, click Change in the Reference Position dialog. The Coordinate System dialog appears. Select the coordinate system.
If your base files come from a public data source such as a Trimble Reference Station (TRS) or Community Base Station (CBS), the reference position is probably accurate. In this case, do not edit any of the fields in this dialog unless you are certain about what you are doing.
To select the reference position from a base file:
1. Click Set From Base File in the Reference Position dialog. The following dialog appears:
2. Highlight the base file that has the correct reference position for your use and click OK. The reference position from the file appears in the Reference Position dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 247
![Page 250: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.3.6 Confirming Reference Position Adjustments
When you click OK in the Reference Position dialog, the following dialog appears if the reference position of any base file does not match the reference position you specified:
This dialog shows how far the reference position of the GPS system will be moved to match the reference position entered previously. A distance of less than 100 meters usually indicates that a reference position was created from an individual GPS position when the base file was collected.
To confirm the position adjustment:
1. Check the distances displayed in the dialog.
2. If a distance displayed for a base file is greater than 100 meters, the base file may have been collected at a different location. See Confirm Reference Position Adjustments Dialog, page 275 for more details on the implications of base file distances.
If you want to exclude a base file from the list, highlight it and click Exclude.
C Warning – Excluding base files may leave gaps in your base file coverage. As a result, some positions in your rover files may not be corrected.
3. Click OK.
248 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 251: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.3.7 Generating the Corrected Files
The Corrected Files window lets you specify the path and folder that the output files will be written to. The current path and folder is displayed alongside the Output Folder button. By default it is the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
To change the output folder:
• Type the output folder path and name directly into the box provided.
OR
• Click Browse. The Browse for Folder dialog appears. Use it to select a different folder.
To correct the rover files:
1. Click OK. The time required for correcting the rover files varies depending on the size of the files, the number of base files used, and the speed of your office computer.
2. When differential correction is successful, a message similar to the following appears:
If not all the positions in the file are corrected successfully, click More Details to see a detailed log. The log file tells you which file the uncorrected positions are in, and may give reasons why the positions could not be corrected.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 249
![Page 252: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Using Differential Correction
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.3.8 Troubleshooting
If differential correction is unsuccessful a message similar to the following appears:
Click More Details to see a detailed log of the differential correction process. The log file gives the basic reasons for the differential correction failure. For more details, see the base or rover audit file. Audit files track the differential correction process, and you may be able to isolate the point at which the operation failed. For more information, see Audit File Contents, page 278. Common reasons for failure are also documented in Troubleshooting, page 293.
22.3.9 Exiting the Differential Correction Utility
The Differential Correction Utility automatically closes when a correction operation is completed successfully. If differential correction was not successful and you want to repeat the process, restart the Differential Correction utility.
To exit the Differential Correction utility:
• Click Close.
The Differential Correction utility exits and closes its window.
250 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 253: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.4User InterfaceThis section contains a detailed, field-by-field description of the Differential Correction utility. Use it as a reference guide. When you start the Differential Correction utility, the Differential Correction window appears:
The following sections describe this window and any dialogs that you can access from it.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 251
![Page 254: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.4.1 Differential Correction Window
The main window of the Differential Correction utility consists of four groups of controls. They display the selected rover and base files, the folder where the corrected files will be stored and the extension they will be given, and the processing options. Command buttons let you begin the correction process or alter program settings.
This section describes each area of this window in turn.
Rover Files This group lets you specify the files to be differentially corrected.
The Folder field displays the current path and folder of the selected files.
The Selected Files list displays the names of the rover files that will be differentially corrected. By default, these are the last-used set of files. If you have just downloaded a set of SSF files from a data collector, for example, they will appear. Use the scroll bar or up arrow and down arrow to view all the files if there are too many to fit in the box.
252 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 255: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The Browse button lets you select a different set of rover files. When you click it, the following dialog appears:
The selected rover files are highlighted in the box. There are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
• Replace the list by clicking on a single file, or holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on a number of files.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files with the mouse.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and clicking on the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including that file will be selected or unselected.
• Details of the selected file, or last selected file, are displayed at the bottom of the dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 253
![Page 256: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Base Files This group lets you specify the base files that will be used to differentially correct the rover files.
The Folder field displays the current path and folder of the selected base files.
The Selected Files list displays the names of the base files that will be used to differentially correct the rover files. Use the scroll bar or up arrow and down arrow to view all the files if there are too many to fit in the box.
Local Search This button lets you automatically select base files from a local folder. You can configure the search and edit its results.
Note – You must select one or more rover files before clicking Local Search. The start and end times of the rover files are used as the criteria for base file selection.
Click Local Search and the Local Search for Base Files dialog appears. For more information see Local Search for Base Files Dialog, page 258.
Internet Search This button lets you automatically select base files from a base data provider with a Web page. You can configure the search and edit its results.
Note – You must select one or more rover files before clicking Internet Search. The start and end times of the rover files are used as the criteria for base file selection.
Click Internet Search and the Internet Search dialog appears. For more information see Internet Search, page 286.
254 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 257: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Browse This button in the Base Files group lets you select a set of base files.
Click Browse. The following dialog appears:
The selected base files are highlighted in the File name window. There are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
• Replace the list by clicking on a single file, or holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on a number of files.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files with the mouse.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and clicking on the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including that file will be selected or unselected.
Details of the selected file, or last selected file, are displayed at the bottom of the dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 255
![Page 258: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Selecting Base Files for Updated Files
If you have reopened a rover file and added GPS positions, you will have periods of time that base station data is not required. Using the local search and internet search functions in the Differential Correction utility you will obtain base files covering the complete time span of the file. This may lead to downloading unnecessary files. The alternative is to download the base files manually.
To do this you need to determine the time periods of the GPS data in the rover file. Open the rover file in the time line view in the GPS Pathfinder Office software and note the start and stop times for the GPS positions. Note that these times are in local time, not GPS time.
Select the matching base files from your usual base station provider and transfer them to the base folder of the appropriate project. Now use the Local Search button to select them. You will be prompted that coverage is less than 100%, however you should be able to proceed and correct all of the GPS positions in the rover file.
Note – To identify the matching base files look at the date and time property of each file. Alternatively, look at the base file name, which is often in year-month-day-hour format.
Base stations create filenames using either local time or GPS time. To interpret the filenames correctly, you need to know your base station provider’s file format.
Corrected Files This group lets you specify the folder where the differentially corrected output files will be stored. You can also specify the extension of the output files.
The Output Folder field displays the current output folder. By default this is the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
256 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 259: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/259.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The Browse button lets you change the output folder. Click Browse and the Browse for Folder dialog appears. See the Basics of Operation chapter in the GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide for information on this dialog.
The File Extension field specifies the three-letter file extension that will be added to your corrected files. By default the extension is COR. To change the extension, enter the new extension into this field.
Note – Differential Correction does not allow the input and output files to have the same extension.
Processing This group lets you select the type of processing that will be performed by the Differential Correction utility.
Table 22.1 shows the options available:
Table 22.1 Processing group contents
Option Description
Smart Code and Carrier Phase Processing
The rover files will be differentially corrected first. Any files with carrier data will be subsequently processed for carrier phase correction.
Code Processing Only
The rover files will be differentially corrected only, regardless of the content of the data files.
Carrier Phase Processing Only
The rover files will be carrier phase processed only.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 257
![Page 260: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/260.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Control Buttons
Click OK to begin differential correction. A series of progress bars will indicate the status of the differential correction process.
Click Cancel or Close to exit the Differential Correction program without differentially correcting any data.
Click Help to access the online help system. Click on a topic; the Differential Correction Help displays information on that topic.
Click Settings to set up parameters for differential correction. The Differential Correction Settings dialog appears. For more information see Differential Correction Settings, page 277.
22.4.2 Local Search for Base Files Dialog
When you click Local Search the following dialog appears:
Use this dialog to specify the kind of search and the folder to be searched.
258 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 261: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Note – The Local search for base files function may not work reliably when base files have a rollover period of less than one hour or have file names of eight digits but which are not in the standard (YYMMDDHH) format. To overcome this problem, manually select the base files using the Browse button.
Search In This window contains controls for setting the folder in which to search for base files.
The Folder field displays the folder that will be searched for base files. By default, it points to the base file folder of the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder. Click Browse if you need to change it. The Browse for Folder dialog appears:
Preferred Base File Prefix This field lets you specify a one or two character prefix included in the base file name (for example "b") to help speed the search.
Maximum Base File Span This field lets you enter the maximum number of hours that each base file covers.
Search Click this button to initiate the search. When the search is complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears and you can accept or modify the results.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 259
![Page 262: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/262.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Selecting Base Files for Updated Files If you have reopened a rover file and added GPS positions, you will have periods of time that base station data is not required. Using the local search and internet search functions in the Differential Correction utility you will obtain base files covering the complete time span of the file. This may lead to downloading unnecessary files. The alternative is to download the base files manually.
To do this you need to determine the time periods of the GPS data in the rover file. Open the rover file in the time line view in the GPS Pathfinder Office software and note the start and stop times for the GPS positions. Note that these times are in local time, not GPS time.
Select the matching base files from your usual base station provider and download them to the base folder of the appropriate project. Now use the Local Search button to select them. You will be prompted that coverage is less than 100%, however you should be able to proceed and correct all of the GPS positions in the rover file.
Note – To identify the matching base files look at the date and time property of each file. Alternatively, look at the base file name, which is often in year-month-day-hour format.
Note – Base stations create filenames using either local time or GPS time. To interpret the filenames correctly, you need to know your base station provider’s file format.
260 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 263: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.4.3 Internet Search Dialog
When you click Internet Search the following dialog appears:
Note – If a base station provider has not been previously setup, you will be prompted to do so. See Using Internet Search (First Time), page 286 for more information on setting up a base station provider.
Base Data Provider This field displays the name of the organization from which base data was last retrieved. Click on the drop-down arrow to select from the drop-down list of previously used providers.
New Base Station Provider Click New to select a new base station provider, the following dialog appears:
This dialog lets you specify how the new provider will be setup.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 261
![Page 264: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Table 22.2 shows the options available:
Delete Click this button to remove the currently displayed base station provider from the list.
Properties Click this button to display the properties of the currently selected base station provider, the Provider Properties dialog appears. For more information on this dialog, see Provider Properties, page 290.
OK Click this button to begin searching. The Differential Correction utility searches in the address displayed in the Internet Server note tab of the Provider Properties dialog for files that cover the rover files.
22.4.4 Provider Properties Dialog
The Provider Properties dialog lets you view and edit the settings for your base data provider. If you configure a base data provider by selecting it from a list the provider properties will be automatically filled in, however, if you wish to set up a new base data provider manually you will need to fill the fields of the dialog.
Table 22.2 New Base Station Provider dialog contents
Option Description
Select from the current list Select this option to select base station files from a list of Internet base station data providers. The base station providers are sorted and listed with the closest providers to your rover files listed first.
Copy the most up-to-date list from the Trimble Internet site, and select from it
The list of Internet base data providers changes often. Select this option to automatically get the latest list from the Trimble Internet server. Then select from the list, listing the closest provider to your rover files first.
Enter the details yourself The Provider Properties dialog is displayed, letting you manually enter the details of your base station provider. For more information on this dialog, see Provider Properties, page 290.
262 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 265: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
When setting up a new base data provider manually, the Provider Properties dialog appears as follows:
The four note tabs in this dialog are described in the following sections.
General tab This tab provides general information about the base station provider. Each field in the tab is described in the sections below.
Note – Only the Organization field is required, all the others are optional.
Organization This field lets you specify the organization that owns the base station.
Station Location This field lets you specify the location of the base station.
Postal Address This field lets you specify the postal address of the base station owner.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 263
![Page 266: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Contact Name This field lets you specify the contact name for the base data provider.
Web Home Page This field lets you enter the Web address for the base station provider’s home page.
Go To Click this button to launch your Web browser and go to the Web address in the Web Home Page field. If nothing happens when you click the Go To button, then Windows is probably not set up to automatically launch your Web browser. Manually open your preferred Web browser and then click the Go To button. If this also fails, select the address in the Web home page field, and copy and paste this into the URL address field of your browser.
E-mail Address This field lets you enter the e-mail address of the base station provider contact person.
Send Mail Click this button to send an e-mail to the base station provider contact person. The address entered in the E-mail Address field will be used. If this does not work, then it is likely that your e-mail application is not set up appropriately, so manually copy the e-mail address into your e-mail application.
Telephone This field lets you specify the telephone number of the base station provider.
Fax This field lets you specify the fax number of the base station provider.
BBS Number This field lets you specify the Bulletin Board Service (BBS) number of the base station provider.
264 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 267: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.4.5 Base Station Tab
The Base Station tab provides information about the type of base station and the reference position of the base station. It appears as follows:
Note – All the fields from this dialog are optional.
The following sections describe each field in the dialog.
Receiver Type This field lets you specify the type of GPS receiver used at the base station.
Base Station Type This field lets you specify the type of base station used. For example, type Trimble CBS if the base station is a Trimble Community Base Station.
Other Information This field lets you enter any additional information about the base station. For example, you may wish to take note of any operational details of the base station.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 265
![Page 268: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Reference Position (WGS-84) This group lets you enter the reference position for the base station. The reference position should be entered in Latitude/Longitude (WGS-84) coordinates.
22.4.6 Internet Server Tab
The Internet Server tab contains the controls for specifying the address of the base station provider and the structure of file names generated by the provider.
The following sections describe each field in the dialog.
C Warning – It is important that you enter the correct information in this dialog. If you are unsure about what to enter, contact your system administrator or Internet service provider.
266 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 269: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Address format This field lets you enter the Internet address and the format that will be used to search for base files. Enter the address and the filename format of the base files. The filename format usually begins and ends with the substitution string “%”, and uses “Y”, or “YY” for year, “MM” for month, “DD” for day and “HH” for hour (for example: ftp://ftp.trimble.com/public/trsdata/T%YMMDDHH%.exe).
The address format does not have to be an Internet address (ftp:// or http://). It can also be a drive on your computer or Local Area Network. This would be very useful if you have a Trimble Reference Station (TRS) or a Community Base Station (CBS) on your organization's network. For example, you might enter: file://N:\public\cbs\%YYMMDDHH%.zip or just N:\public\cbs\%YYMMDDHH%.zip. When you perform an Internet search, this will copy the required files from CBS folder on the N: drive to your project base folder.
Note – The file:// protocol does not support long names for files or folders.
Base Server Type This group lets you specify the type of base server used by the base data provider. Table 22.3 outlines the options available:
For more details on finding base files via the Internet, see Using a CORS site, page 268.
Table 22.3 Base Server Type group contents
Option Description
US NGS CORS Format
Select US NGS CORS Format (Continuously Operating Reference Station) if the base station provider is a US NGS CORS base station. You are then required to enter in a base station identification code.
Other Select Other if the base station provider is not a CORS base station. You must then enter the time format of the base data filename, and the time span of the base files.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 267
![Page 270: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Using a CORS site When you select one of the CORS sites from the Internet Base Data Provider list the provider properties will be automatically filled in. You can view these by clicking Properties on the Internet Search dialog.
The URL below contains a template for start time, duration, year, day of year and a four-character site name
http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/cgi- cors/ufcors2.prl?newstart=%HH%&duration=%LL%&year=%YYYY%&yearday=%DDDDD%&siteselection=%CCCC%&epic="As Is"&datasheets=no&compr=pkzip
268 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 271: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Table 22.4 defines this address format.
When the Differential Correction utility evaluates the URL for a CORS site, it substitutes the appropriate values for the masks to obtain the final URL. Submitting this URL initiates the download of files.
If you have problems connecting to the CORS site, you can download files manually from http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/cgi-cors/ufcors2.prl.
Troubleshooting If you still have difficulty connecting to the CORS site, see Internet Problems, page 299. Alternatively, contact the Technical Assistance Center on the Trimble website at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm or send an e-mail to [email protected].
Table 22.4 Address formats
Mask Description
%HH% Start hour of the day (0, 1, …, 23)
%LL% Duration (1, …, 24)
%YYYY% Start year
%DDDDD% Start day of year
%CCCC% CORS station identifier (4-character)
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 269
![Page 272: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.4.7 Security Tab
The Security tab lets you specify whether the base data provider’s Internet server is publicly accessible or not.
The following sections describe each field in the dialog.
Public Access Select this option if your base data provider’s Internet server is accessible by the general public.
Restricted Access Select this option if your base data provider’s Internet server is accessible only by users who have been allocated the appropriate access rights. You will then be required to enter a user name and password to access the server.
270 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 273: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.4.8 Confirm Selected Base Files Dialog
When an automatic search for base files is complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears:
The Rover Files column lists the rover files that were selected.
The Coverage column indicates how much of each rover file is covered by the selected base files.
Table 22.5 shows the three possible values:
The Base File column lists the base file(s) that were found.
Table 22.5 Selected Base Files dialog values
Value Description
Full The rover file is fully covered by the listed base file(s). All positions in it should be differentially correctable.
Partial The rover file is partially covered by the listed base file(s). Only some of the positions in this file can be differentially corrected. Use the Start Time and End Time columns to see which parts of the rover file are not covered.
None The rover file is not covered by the listed base file(s). No positions in this file can be differentially corrected.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 271
![Page 274: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The Start Time and End Time columns display the start and end times for both the rover and base files.
To hide the base file names, click on the to the left of each rover filename or double-click the rover filename. The base file names are hidden.
Click OK if you are satisfied that base file coverage is adequate. This opens the Reference Position dialog or returns you to the Differential Correction window.
22.4.9 Reference Position Dialog
This dialog may appear after you manually or automatically select base files:
Use it to check that the coordinates of the reference position and the antenna height used at the base station are correctly entered.
C Warning – An incorrect reference position will create errors in your corrected rover files.
272 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 275: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
If you always use base files from the same source, such as a Community Base Station, you may not need to make this check.
Note – This dialog does not appear if all selected base files have the same reference position, and this position is the same as that used in the previous session. If you always use base files from the same source, such as a Community Base Station, the dialog will probably not appear. You can force the dialog to appear every time by selecting the Always Required option in the Options note tab of the Differential Correction Settings dialog.
The fields and buttons in this dialog are described in the following sections.
Reference Position The fields in this group specify the coordinates of the reference position of the selected base files. By default, these coordinates are taken from the first selected base file. They must be in terms of the current coordinate system, displayed at the bottom of the dialog.
The Station Northing and Station Easting fields may be replaced by Latitude and Longitude, depending on the coordinate system.
The Height field displays either MSL (Mean Sea Level) or HAE (Height Above Ellipsoid), depending on the setting in the coordinate system.
Note – It is important that these fields show the exact coordinates of the reference position. In many cases they are supplied automatically, but if you recorded the base files yourself, you must enter them manually.
C Warning – Take care to enter the correct hemisphere (N, S, E, or W) when entering a reference position as a Latitude/Longitude. Also make sure you know whether your reference height is in HAE or MSL.
The Antenna Height field specifies the height of the base station antenna. To obtain a height, measure from the ground to a specified point on the antenna. Consult your antenna documentation to establish this specified point.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 273
![Page 276: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Note – It is important to enter the precise antenna height of the selected base files. In many cases this is supplied automatically, but if you recorded the base files yourself you must enter the height manually. For base files collected with an Asset Surveyor data collector, the antenna height will show as zero. This is because it has already been added to the station height.
Set From Base File This button lets you specify the reference position coordinates and antenna height from a base file that you choose. Use it if the values displayed in the dialog are not correct, but are correct in another base file.
When you click Set From Base File, the following dialog appears:
Select the base file with the correct reference position and click OK. The Choose Reference Position dialog disappears and the reference position is updated in the Confirm Reference Position dialog.
274 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 277: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Coordinate System
This group displays the current coordinate system and zone (or site). The Differential Correction utility interprets the reference position coordinates in terms of this coordinate system. By default it is Latitude/Longitude in the WGS-84 datum.
The Change button lets you change the current coordinate system. You need to do this if you want to enter the reference position in a different coordinate system and zone. Click Change and the Coordinate System dialog appears. Select the coordinate system and zone, or the local site, then click OK to return to the Reference Position dialog.
22.4.10 Confirm Reference Position Adjustments Dialog
When you have confirmed the reference position by clicking OK in the Reference Position or Choose Reference Position dialog, the following dialog may appear:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 275
![Page 278: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The Confirm Reference Position Adjustments dialog shows the differences between the confirmed reference position and the actual reference positions within each base file. The Distance column shows the full distance, and the Longitude, Latitude, and Height columns show the distances along the corresponding axes.
The dialog will not appear if all distances are 0.
Use this dialog to determine if any base files were not recorded at the reference position entered in the Reference Position dialog. You might have selected base files from different locations. Alternatively, the search folder may contain files from different locations that were selected automatically.
Use the distance as the criterion:
• A distance of less than 100 meters usually indicates that a reference position was created from an individual GPS position when the base file was collected.
• A distance of greater than 100 meters generally indicates that the base file was collected at a different location from the other base files. This base file should not be used together with the other base files. Exclude it or reselect the correct base files.
B Tip – A surer method of excluding the wrong base files is to keep base files from different locations in separate folders so they can never be selected together.
• A very large distance (hundreds of thousands or millions of meters) usually indicates that a base file does not have a reference position. In effect, the reference position is at 0ºN, 0ºE. The distance shown is the distance between this position and the confirmed reference position. Generally, these files can be used as long as you are sure that they were collected at the confirmed reference position.
Exclude Click this button to remove the highlighted base file from the list. This base file will not be used to differentially correct the data files. The discussion above indicates when to exclude base files.
276 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 279: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
C Warning – Excluding base files may leave gaps in your base file coverage. As a result, some positions in your rover files may not be corrected.
22.4.11 Differential Correction Settings
In the Differential Correction window, click Settings to display the Differential Correction Settings dialog. This dialog lets you set the parameters for differential correction. It consists of four tabbed pages. Each tab is described in a separate section below.
Output
This tab controls the output settings for the corrected files and audit files. It appears as follows:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 277
![Page 280: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Output Positions These options lets you specify the type of data to be output to the corrected file. Table 22.6 shows the contents of the Output Positions options.
Audit File Contents These options lets you specify what is written to audit files. If differential correction is unsuccessful, you can use these audit files to help determine why.
Rover audit files contain a variety of information that can be used to trace the problems with differential correction. They list processing parameters, available ephemeris data, and the number of position and velocity records processed in each satellite constellation tracked. The files also contain the final warning and/or error messages that can indicate why a differential correction failed.
Rover audit files are created in the same folder as the corrected rover files. One audit file is created per input rover file. Audit files have the same prefix as the rover file and the extension, aur.
A base audit file is created in the same folder as the base file(s). Only one base audit file is created per differential correction session. If only one base file was used to differentially correct the rover data, the file name is the prefix of the base file and the extension, aub. If more than one base file was used, the file name is Combbase.aub. If the Differential Correction utility cannot put the aub file in the base file folder, for example if it is full or you do not have write access to it, then the aub file will be put in the GPS Pathfinder Office software’s temporary folder, which is \Windows\PFCommon\Temp by default.
Table 22.6 Output Positions contents
Option Description
Corrected Only Only corrected position and velocity records are output.
Corrected and Uncorrected
Both corrected and uncorrected position and velocity records are output.
278 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 281: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Table 22.7 shows the options available:
Base Options
This tab controls the processing of the base files. It appears as follows:
Table 22.7 Audit File contents
Option Description
None No audit file will be produced.
Standard A standard audit file is produced, showing basic information about the differential correction session.
Expanded An expanded audit file is produced, showing detailed epoch-by-epoch information about the differential correction session.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 279
![Page 282: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Reference Confirmation These options control whether the Reference Position dialog appears every time you select base files.
Table 22.8 shows the options available:
If you always use base files from the same source, such as a Community Base Station, you can select Not Required if Identical to Previous Session in order to suppress the Reference Position dialog. With this option set, you only see the dialog if you select base files with a different reference position from that used in the previous session. This can occur if you change the source of your base files.
B Tip – Select the Always Required option if you record your own base files. If the reference position is omitted or entered incorrectly in the field, it must be entered correctly in the Reference Position dialog, otherwise the positions in your corrected rover files will be wrong.
Elevation This field lets you specify the minimum elevation. Usually you set the elevation mask in your base station data collector. If for some reason it was set incorrectly, however, you can specify it here and filter out any data that was collected from satellites too low on the horizon. Base station data from any satellite that is below the specified elevation is not used in differential correction.
Note – A value of 0º indicates that no positions will be filtered out.
Table 22.8 Reference Confirmation contents
Option Description
Always Required The Reference Position dialog is always displayed after selecting base files.
Not Required if Identical to Previous Session
The Reference Position dialog is only displayed if the reference position in all selected base files is not the same as that used in the previous session.
280 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 283: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
SNR This field lets you specify the minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR). Usually you set the SNR mask in your base station data collector. If for some reason it was set incorrectly, however, you can specify it here and filter out any data that was collected from satellites with a low SNR. Base station data from any satellite that has an SNR below the specified value is not used in differential correction.
Note – A value of 0 indicates that no positions will be filtered out.
Code Processing
This tab controls the processing of the rover files. It appears as follows:
Rover Processing Technique Noise reduction by filtering velocities can be used to improve the results when the rover file data has been affected by multipath (generally indicated by “spikes” in line and area features).
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 281
![Page 284: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
You may suspect multipath if differentially corrected rover data collected by a stationary receiver exhibits a tendency to wander excessively. For example, rover data collected by a Pro XR or Pro XRS based system typically does not fluctuate by more than about a meter. Rover data collected with any 2, 3, or 6-channel receiver does not tend to fluctuate by more than about 2 to 5 meters.
Note – Only use velocity filtering if you collected velocity data in your rover file(s). If no velocity data is present, velocity filtering will not improve results.
Table 22.9 shows the options available:
Correct Velocity Records Select this check box to differentially correct any velocity records in the rover files. The accuracy of the velocity measurements can be improved with this option selected.
This option has no effect if there are no velocity records present in any of the selected rover files. Velocity records from a GeoExplorer I and II, or GPS Pathfinder Basic Series GPS receiver are not correctable.
Table 22.9 Rover Processing Technique Noise contents
Option Description
Standard Results in standard, epoch by epoch processing. This is the default option for processing rover data.
With Velocity Filtering Filters the rover data based on velocity data in the file. Velocity data is used to help predict where the next position should be, and smooth out any large leaps or spikes in the data.
This setting is recommended if you are mobile and in a multipath environment, for example if you are driving and recording streets in an urban environment.
282 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 285: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Correct Real-time DGPS Positions Select this check box to improve the accuracy of real-time corrected positions. You can only use data collected with a Pro XR or Pro XRS system and a data collector that supports postprocessed real-time positions. The accuracy of the real-time positions is improved to the same quality as postprocessed uncorrected positions.
This option has no effect if there are no postprocessed real-time positions present in any of the selected rover files.
Base Processing Technique You can use these options to improve results when the base station data is noisy or of unusually low quality. However it is unlikely that you will need to alter the default setting if your base station receiver is a recommended Trimble receiver. See Obtaining Optimal Accuracy, page 230 for a list of these receivers.
Noisy base station data can result from multipath or old and inferior receiver technology. Consider using a noise reduction technique in the following situations:
• When the receiver is a 6-channel receiver used to record synchronized data.
• When the base station data is collected by a Series 4000 receiver that was not configured to utilize smoothed pseudoranges. The configuration of the Series 4000 receiver can be verified via the front panel of the receiver.
• When the base data was obtained in the RINEX format and converted to the SSF format.
• When multipath is suspected at the base station site.
You may suspect multipath if differentially corrected rover data collected by a stationary receiver exhibits a tendency to wander excessively. For example, rover data collected by a Pro XR or Pro XRS based system typically does not fluctuate more than one meter. Rover data collected with any 2, 3, or 6 channel receiver does not tend to fluctuate more than 2–5 meters.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 283
![Page 286: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Changing the setting can improve your differential correction results when the base data is of less than optimal quality. If your base data is of high quality it will not harm your results, however, processing time will increase.
Table 22.10 shows the options available:
Table 22.10 Base Processing Technique contents
Option Description
Standard Results in standard, epoch by epoch processing. This is the default option for processing base station data.
With Filtering Filters the base station data. You can obtain additional quality control information about the processing in the base audit file when this option is checked. The base audit file contains computed measurement residuals and statistics of rejected outliers in the data. As a result of using this option, the corrected positions at the rover site have smaller standard deviation and produce a better averaged position. This method is slightly more time consuming than the standard option.
With Filtering and Smoothing
Filters and smoothes the base station corrections. This is an advanced option used under scenarios similar to those mentioned above. This method further reduces the systematic and random errors in the base station data by additional backward smoothing of all differential corrections. This method is relatively time consuming compared to the options above. In addition, during processing it requires approximately 1 MB of disk space per hour of base station data. The time requirements are dependent on the speed of your office computer.
284 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 287: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – User Interface 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Zipped Files
This tab contains settings for handling zipped files. It appears as follows:
Delete Zipped Files after Processing Select this check box to delete zipped base files once processing is complete. If this option is selected, only the Zipped files will be deleted.
This option has no effect if the selected base files are not zipped.
Delete Unzipped Files after Processing Select this check box to delete unzipped base files once processing is complete. During the processing the base files will be unzipped.
This option has no effect if the selected base files are zipped.
Overwrite Existing Files when Unzipping Select this check box to allow existing files of the same name to be overwritten when unzipping base files. If files of the same name already exist and this option is not selected, the differential correction process will halt.
This option has no effect if the selected base files are not zipped.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 285
![Page 288: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.5Internet SearchThis section provides additional information on using the Internet Search functionality. It also gives step-by-step instructions for setting up an Internet base station provider.
22.5.1 Using Internet Search (First Time)
When you click Internet Search for the first time, the following dialog appears:
Click No, to view the pre-installed list of Base Providers.
Note – Trimble recommends that you use only the latest list.
286 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 289: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Click Yes to get the latest list from the Trimble Internet server. The Confirm Internet Setup dialog appears:
This dialog gives you the opportunity to confirm that your Internet settings are correct. If you are unsure as to how your Internet settings are configured, click the Set up Internet Connection button to configure your Internet settings. For information on setting up your Internet connection, see Internet Setup, page 288, or see your System Administrator or Internet Service Provider.
If your Windows Internet settings are correct, and Internet transfers are working properly, you can permanently turn this dialog off by selecting the Don't show this message again check box.
Click Yes to continue.
A list of base providers is downloaded and appears in the Select a Base Provider dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 287
![Page 290: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.5.2 Internet Setup
The GPS Pathfinder Office software does not install or set up your Internet connection. It simply uses the Internet facilities built into your computer’s operating system. It is your responsibility to set up Windows for your Internet connection.
Trimble is not responsible for setting up your Internet connection, or for solving any Internet problems that may occur.
For questions or support concerning your Internet connection, please contact your System Administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP).
There are several steps required to set up Windows for Internet access. The following is not a full description, but merely a starting point. Consult the documentation supplied with Windows and by your ISP for further details.
• You must make sure that the appropriate parts of Windows are installed. For example, Dial-Up Networking is an optional component of Windows that is required for dial up connections to the Internet. Also, Windows 95 Plus! contains the Internet Jumpstart Kit, which makes it easier to set up access to the Internet.
• If your organization already has permanent Internet access, then contact your System Administrator for help to set up your computer. You will need to set it up for access via a LAN, and probably for access through a proxy server (also known as a firewall). Your System Administrator will need to supply the address and port of the proxy.
If you will be using a dial-up Internet connection, then you will need a modem and an account with an Internet Service Provider (ISP). The ISP will usually give you documentation on how to set up Windows so that you can dial up and connect to the Internet through them.
• Once you have this required information, there are two ways of setting up Windows for Internet access.
288 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 291: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The easiest way is to run the Internet Connection Wizard, by choosing Start / Programs / Accessories / Internet Tools / Get on the Internet. If this is not installed, then the other way is to directly change the settings by double-clicking the Internet icon in Control Panel.
22.5.3 Select a Base Provider
When you click Yes in the Confirm Internet Setup dialog, the Select a Base Provider dialog appears:
Providers are sorted by proximity to the rover data, so that base stations closest to your data collection location appear high in the list. Select your preferred base provider from the list and click OK. The Provider Properties dialog appears.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 289
![Page 292: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.5.4 Provider Properties
When you click OK in the Select a Base Provider dialog, the Provider Properties dialog appears:
Click OK to accept the settings.
The Internet Search dialog appears:
Click OK to begin the search with the current settings. The Confirm Internet Setup dialog appears.
290 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 293: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.5.5 Performing Internet Search
When you click OK in the Internet Search dialog, the Confirm Internet Setup dialog appears:
This lets you confirm that your Internet settings are correct. Click Yes to continue.
The software first checks the base folder of your current project for any of the files it needs. If the required base data files are found the Found Local Files dialog appears:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 291
![Page 294: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Internet Search
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
This dialog gives you the option of continuing with the Internet search, or using the local files.
If the correct base files are not found locally, or if you selected the Continue with the Internet Search option in the Found Local Files dialog, the software proceeds to search in the specified Web site.
The following dialog appears:
The Copying Files from Internet dialog shows the files which need to be downloaded, and the status of the download operation. When the download operation is complete, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appears.
For more information, see Internet Problems, page 299.
292 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 295: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.6TroubleshootingLook for help in one of the following sections:
• If the differential correction failed, see Preventing Failures, page 293.
• If you need help to evaluate your results, see Evaluating Corrected Files, page 294.
• If most or all of the data was uncorrected, or the corrected data was inaccurate, see Reasons for Incomplete or Inaccurate Correction, page 295.
• If you have problems with connecting to the Internet, see Internet Problems, page 299.
22.6.1 Preventing Failures
To prevent the failure of your differential correction, edit or manipulate rover (data) files after differential correction. In particular, if you carry out any of the following before differentially correcting the data, adverse effects are likely:
• Permanently Averaging Positions You cannot differentially correct the output files created using the Positions Only method in the Grouping utility. This method writes to the output file only the mean position of each file or group of positions. The result is a permanent average for each set of positions processed. To avoid this, use the Points method to create point features from each file or group of positions. The difference is that all the original positions in the file are maintained, and averaging is done when the point feature is displayed, queried, or exported to a GIS or CAD format.
Features created using the Points, Lines, and Areas methods in the Grouping utility can be differentially corrected without penalty.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 293
![Page 296: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
• Combining Files A rover file created by combining multiple rover files with the Combine utility may not be differentially correctable. If the rover files are not combined chronologically, or if there are any time overlaps, the data could fail to correct. To avoid this, differentially correct the multiple files separately and combine the corrected output files. Multiple rover files can be corrected in a single step in the Differential Correction utility.
• Editing Files Rover files cannot be differentially corrected if certain records are deleted in the SSF Record Editor. For example, base files cannot be used for differential correction if navigation or pseudorange measurement data was deleted.
22.6.2 Evaluating Corrected Files
The following errors are removed or almost removed by differential correction:
• Satellite clock errors are removed by differential correction.
• Atmospheric and ionospheric errors are almost all removed by differential correction. The shorter the distance between the base and the rover, the more completely these errors are removed.
• Satellite orbit prediction errors are almost completely removed by differential correction. The shorter the distance between the base and the rover, the more completely these errors are removed.
The following errors remain:
• Poor accuracy results due to high PDOP cannot be improved with differential correction.
• Errors resulting from using excessively weak signals cannot be removed.
294 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 297: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
• Errors resulting from multipath cannot be removed but can be minimized by good operating procedures and collecting multiple positions at a point feature. After differential correction, the average of these corrected positions minimizes the error due to multipath. Recording velocity information and using velocity filtering on the rover file can also help to reduce multipath error.
22.6.3 Reasons for Incomplete or Inaccurate Correction
Table 22.11 and Table 22.12 list the most common reasons for incomplete or inaccurate correction and the suggested fixes.
Table 22.11 Differential correction failures
Failure Reason Description Solution
The base and rover files were not recorded simultaneously.
The base files must start recording data before the rover files start, and must end after the rover files end. Only data collected during the overlapping times can be corrected.
Use the auto-select option to pick base files automatically. The Confirm Base Files dialog will show you which rover files do not overlap base files, and the start and end times of the files.
The rover did not use a subset of the satellites recorded by the base station.
This can happen when elevation masks are set incorrectly in the base or rover, or when the base station does not have a clear view of the sky.
Before data collection, make sure that the rover elevation mask is greater than the elevation of obstructions at the base location. Also increase the rover elevation mask by at least 1º for every 100 kilometers between the base and the rover.
The rover file contains corrupt records.
This may be reported by the Check SSF utility.
If corrupt records are reported, run the Check SSF utility and choose to remove the corrupt records. See the Check SSF online Help for more information.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 295
![Page 298: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The base file was not recorded in base mode and does not contain GPS measurement data.
Base files need measurement data to differentially correct rover files.
If GPS measurements are not recorded the base file cannot be used.
The base station and the rover were too far apart.
The maximum recommended distance between a GPS Pathfinder receiver and a base station depends on your elevation masks set in both receivers, and should never exceed about 500 km.
Try a different, closer base file if available.
The base file recorded data at a time interval that was too large.
If the measurement logging interval in the base file is greater than 30 seconds, differential correction may be incomplete.
The recommended measurement logging interval is between 3 and 5 seconds. It should not exceed 30 seconds. Check the logging intervals on the base file.
The base station reference position was not entered correctly.
If the reference position is off by more than 1000 meters, differential correction can fail.
Make sure that the hemispheres (N, S, E, W) are entered correctly in the base file Reference Position dialog.
Table 22.11 Differential correction failures (Continued)
Failure Reason Description Solution
296 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 299: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
The office computer did not have room for the files created during differential correction.
Files could not be saved causing differential correction to fail.
Check the amount of available disk space. Delete unnecessary files, particularly old SSF files. If outputting to a network drive, try using a different drive.
You performed an operation on the file that makes it unable to be differentially corrected.
A file that was averaged using the Positions Only method in the Grouping and Averaging utility cannot be differentially corrected. Combining multiple files in the wrong order can also make some of the data uncorrectable.
Check that the positions in the files were not averaged before differential correction. If they were, try differential correction again using a backup copy of the unaveraged rover files. Check that the files were not combined in the wrong time order.
You do not know why differential correction failed.
Differential correction failed for some unreported reason.
Check the audit files to determine why differential correction failed.
Table 22.11 Differential correction failures (Continued)
Failure Reason Description Solution
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 297
![Page 300: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Table 22.12 Carrier phase processing failures
Failure Reason
Description Solution
The base station and the rover are too far apart.
The maximum recommended distance between a GPS Pathfinder receiver and a base station is less than 75 km. In order to achieve centimeter accuracy, the distance between base and rover should be less than 10 km.
Use different, closer base files if available.
Common observation in rover and base is too short.
The continuous common observation in the rover and the base must not be less than 5 minutes. In order to achieve centimeter level accuracy, the continuous common observations must not be less than 45 minutes.
Collect enough phase data in the field. During the field operation, do not block satellite signals to the antenna. This makes sure that continuous observation is maintained. Make sure you use the base files that cover the rover file observation.
Rover and Base have different phase data logging rate.
A position solution will be generated at the rate of the least common multiple of base and rover phase data logging rates. For example, if the rover phase and position logging interval is 3 seconds and the logging interval at the base is 5 seconds, a position fix will be made every 15 seconds. Due to this fact, some positions at the rover may not be corrected while some are corrected.
Use the right phase data logging rate at both the rover and the base.
Noisy data. Too many cycle slips and a signal to noise ratio (SNR) being too low may cause the rover position to be uncorrectable or of a low accuracy.
During the field operation, try to avoid blocking the satellite signals and stay as far as possible from reflective objects.
298 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 301: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/301.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
22.6.4 Internet Problems
A helpful rule for solving Internet searching problems: If Internet Explorer works, then the Internet Search in the Differential Correction utility will also work.
Specifically, if Internet Explorer can access and download base files from your chosen Internet base data provider, then this establishes that Windows is set up correctly to work with the Internet.
Internet Explorer uses the Windows settings—as does the Differential Correction utility. Some other browsers, such as Netscape, do not use the Windows settings—but use their own settings instead. Using a browser other than Internet Explorer does not help with troubleshooting Differential Correction problems.
If Internet Explorer cannot download the base files, then there is a problem with your Windows setup. Trimble is not responsible for setting up your Internet connection, or for solving any Internet problems that may occur. You may need help from your System Administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to resolve the problem.
Note – After changing the Windows Internet settings, you must close and restart Differential Correction for the changes to take effect.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 299
![Page 302: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/302.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Table 22.13 lists possible causes and solutions for problems relating to Internet connections.
Table 22.13 Internet correction failures
Symptom Cause Fix
You can’t find a local Internet base data provider in the list.
Your base data provider list is not up to date.
Create a new provider, and choose the "Copy the latest list from the Trimble Internet site, and select from it" option.
Even the latest list does not contain a local provider that you are aware of.
Create a new provider, and choose the radio button that lets you enter the details yourself. You may need to contact the local provider to ask for some of the important details.
You cannot connect to the Internet. A time-out error occurs, or it fails to dial up the ISP.
Windows’ Internet configuration is not set up correctly. Perhaps your modem is not installed correctly, or Dial Up Networking is not set up correctly.
Check the Windows Internet settings (via the Internet icon in Control Panel). Try using Internet Explorer to determine whether it can access and download the base files. Contact your System Administrator or ISP for further assistance.
300 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 303: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/303.jpg)
The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting 22
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
Failure to dial into the ISP.
Your ISP may be busy with other customers, leaving no spare lines free.
Try again, either immediately or later. Consider changing to an ISP that has more lines.
Failure to copy files from the Internet (error code 500 or 550).
This is a general Internet error code. The most likely causes are that the file or directory does not exist on the server, or that the server was not found.
The file may not exist because it is too old. Most base providers only keep one to three months of data online before archiving. The file may not exist if it is outside the hours logged by the server. For example, some base stations only log data for normal working hours. Also, the base station may have been put out of service during the required time period.It is possible that the specified directory is incorrect, perhaps because the provider has changed the server configuration.If you entered the Base Provider details yourself, check that the server address is correct. Also check that the proxy server is set up correctly. In most cases, you can use Internet Explorer to double-check the required URL (Internet address). If necessary, contact the base data provider.
Your Internet connection is very slow.
The Internet server is very busy, or your ISP is busy, or the line is noisy.
Try again, either immediately or later.
Table 22.13 Internet correction failures (Continued)
Symptom Cause Fix
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 301
![Page 304: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/304.jpg)
22 The Differential Correction Utility – Troubleshooting
Diff
eren
tial C
orre
ctio
n
302 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 305: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/305.jpg)
C H A P T E R
23
23 GPS Pathfinder Office UtilitiesIn this chapter:■ Introduction
■ The Batch Processor utility
■ View menu
■ Grouping utility
■ Combine utility
■ SSF Record Editor
■ Check SSF files
■ SSF to RINEX utility
■ Text Conversion utility
![Page 306: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/306.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Introduction
Util
ities
23.1IntroductionThe utilities documented in this chapter are produced by Trimble Navigation Limited for processing field data. They run under Windows 95 and higher (some smaller utilities run under MS-DOS) and work with the SSF format files created by Trimble data collectors.
These utilities are installed as a part of GPS Pathfinder Office. See the Installation chapter in the GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide for installation instructions.
304 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 307: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/307.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
23.2The Batch Processor UtilityThe Batch Processor utility is designed by Trimble Navigation Limited to automate repetitive tasks that must be performed after you have collected field data. You can set up the Batch Processor utility to:
• download data files from your data collector
• differentially correct your files
• format your files for your particular GIS system
• import and process your files with your GIS software, depending on the power of its own batch or macro language
You can save your settings as a batch setup to use in future sessions. A batch setup will store information about, and specific settings for, the Data Transfer, Differential Correction, Export, and User Command functions you select. It will also associate a particular project with a batch setup.
Note – Any settings you change will be saved only in that named batch setup.
The Batch Processor utility is also closely linked to the Connection Manager utility. You can set up the Connection Manager utility to automatically detect and download data files from a connected data collector, and then run a batch setup automatically. For more information, see Chapter 13, The Connection Manager Utility.
The Batch Processor utility is part of the GPS Pathfinder Office software.
23.2.1 Starting the Batch Processor Utility
Before you can start the Batch Processor utility, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the Batch Processor utility from within the GPS Pathfinder Office software, or directly from Windows.
To start the Batch Processor utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software, do one of the following:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 305
Util
ities
![Page 308: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/308.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
• Click the Batch Processor utility icon .
• Select Utilities / Batch Processor from the menu bar, as shown:
To start the Batch Processor utility from Windows:
• Select Programs / Pathfinder Office <version> / Batch Processor.
306 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 309: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/309.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
The Batch Setup window appears.
23.2.2 Using the Batch Processor Utility
When you create a new batch setup, firstly you name the setup then move through a series of screens where you specify settings for each task. To modify the properties of an existing setup, choose from a list of existing setups, then move through the screens to change settings. Finally, start the processing. The following steps explain what to do for all available tasks. Click Next to go to the screen for the next task you selected. Click Finish when you have set all the tasks you need for the batch setup.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 307
Util
ities
![Page 310: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/310.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Note – Any setup you create without using the Data Transfer utility will not be shown in the available list of batch setups for use with the Connection Manager utility. If you choose to manually select data files as input for the batch process, the Batch Processor utility will pause to let you do this. For more information see Select Input Files Manually, page 327.If you choose to select base files manually for differential correction, the Batch Processor utility will pause to let you do this. For more information see Step 3: Setting Up Differential Correction, page 313.
Information on how to use the Batch Processor utility is described in the following sections.
Batch Processor Log Window
When a batch session is in progress, a window displays a log file which is updated as each different part of the session runs. You can refer to this file once the batch session has finished to confirm that everything was processed as expected. If problems occurred during batch processing, they will be described here. For more information see Batch Processor Log Window, page 345.
308 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 311: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/311.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
23.2.3 Step 1: Using a Batch Setup
Start the Batch Processor utility. The following dialog appears:
If this is the first time you have used the Batch Processor utility, there are two default files available to view.
• Sample file processing setup has manual data selection, Differential Correction, and Export selected, as shown in the dialog above.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 309
Util
ities
![Page 312: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/312.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
• Sample file transfer setup has Data Transfer selected, as shown in the following dialog:
Otherwise the default setup is the last batch setup chosen.
The summary list shown in the dialogs details the steps of the batch process for the selected batch setup. See below for an explanation of the items in the summary lists.
Uses data files that you select manually from a file folder once the Batch Processor utility is run.
Uses data files that are transferred automatically from your data collector or selected manually from your data collector once the Batch Processor utility is run
For more information see Step 2: Setting Up Data Transfer, page 312.
310 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 313: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/313.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Use this dialog to:
• Choose an existing batch setup
• Create a new batch setup
• Modify the properties of an existing batch setup
• Delete a batch setup
When you have finished setting up all the tasks for the batch setup, click Finish on the final dialog, for example Export, or User Command, to return to the main Batch Setup dialog.
Then do one of the following:
• To save and run your batch setup, click Run.
• To save your batch setup and leave the Batch Processor utility without running it, click Close. The setup dialog disappears and you then need to exit the Batch Processor utility window.
Differentially corrects files using base files from a local source, Internet source, or that you select manually.
For more information see Step 3: Setting Up Differential Correction, page 313.
Exports corrected files using a selected export setup.
For more information see Step 4: Setting Up Export, page 315.
If User Command is selected in the batch setup, the following icon appears in the summary list:
Starts a selected program, command or batch file once all other processing has finished.
For more information see Step 5: Setting Up a User Command, page 316.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 311
Util
ities
![Page 314: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/314.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
23.2.4 Step 2: Setting Up Data Transfer
If you include Data Transfer in the batch setup, the following dialog appears:
The Device window displays the data collector you have connected to your computer for transfer of data files.
1. Select one of the following options:
– Transfer all files – transfer all files from your data collector.
– Transfer new and updated files – transfer only new or updated files from your data collector.
– Select files manually.
2. Click Next to continue.
Note – If you do not select Data Transfer, you need to select input files manually once you run the Batch Processor utility. For more information, see Select Input Files Manually, page 327.
312 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 315: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/315.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
23.2.5 Step 3: Setting Up Differential Correction
If you include Differential Correction in the batch setup, the following dialog appears:
1. Select one of the following options:
– Local Search for base files – automatically select base files from the base file folder of the project associated with the current batch setup.
– Internet Search for base files – automatically select base files according to your Internet connection settings. For more information on Internet settings, see Using Internet Search, page 242.
– Select files manually – select base files once you run the Batch Processor utility.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 313
Util
ities
![Page 316: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/316.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
2. Click Settings. The Differential Correction Options dialog appears.
3. Select the appropriate settings.
4. Click Advanced. The Differential Correction Settings Dialog appears.
314 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 317: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/317.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
5. Select the appropriate settings.
6. Click OK in the Settings and Options dialogs to save any changes.
7. Click Next to continue.
23.2.6 Step 4: Setting Up Export
If you select Export for inclusion in the batch setup, the following dialog appears:
By default, the last-used export setup is selected.
Use this dialog to:
• create a new export setup
• modify the properties of an existing export setup
• delete an export setup
Click Next to continue or Finish to return to the Batch Setup dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 315
Util
ities
![Page 318: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/318.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
23.2.7 Step 5: Setting Up a User Command
If you select User Command in the batch setup, the following dialog appears:
To set up a user command, do one of the following:
• Type in a user command
• Click Browse and navigate folders to select a user command.
• Click Finish to return to the Batch Setup dialog.
B Tip – The file created in your settings configuration folder, typically \Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\PFOffice\Config\Expfiles.txt, is created every time files are exported using the Batch Processor utility, or exported manually using the Export utility. The first line of the file contains the directory to which the files were exported, and the following lines list the names of the exported files. If you are creating a macro or batch file to be run as a user command, you may want it to parse Expfiles.txt to determine which files are to be processed each time.
316 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 319: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/319.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
23.2.8 Exiting the Batch Processor Utility
Once you have run the Batch Processor utility, or closed the setup dialog, you need to exit the Batch Processor utility.
To exit the Batch Processor utility:
• In the Batch Processor window, select File / Exit
Note – The log file created during a batch session is not automatically saved when you exit the Batch Processor utility. If you want a permanent copy of the log file:1. Select File / Save As.2. Specify the filename and path where the log file is to be stored.
For more information, see Batch Processor Log Window, page 345.
23.2.9 The Batch Processor Utility Interface
This section contains a field-by-field description of the Batch Processor utility interface. Use this section as a reference to the Batch Processor utility.
• Data Transfer
• Differential Correction
• Export
• User Command
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 317
Util
ities
![Page 320: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/320.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Choose an Existing Batch Setup
To choose an existing setup:
1. Click the drop-down arrow and choose a setup from the list.
2. Click Run.
318 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 321: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/321.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Create a New Batch Setup
1. To create a new setup, click New. The following dialog appears:
2. In the Create group, do one of the following:
– To create a new batch setup, select the New setup option.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 319
Util
ities
![Page 322: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/322.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
– To create a copy of an existing setup, select the Copy of existing setup option and then select a batch setup from the list. The name of your batch setup will appear in the Setup name window at the top of the dialog as Copy of < batch setup name>. You can highlight the name and change it.
3. Click OK. The Overview dialog appears.
4. Select your settings. For more information, see Overview Dialog, page 321.
5. Click Next to continue.
320 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 323: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/323.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Overview Dialog
Functions group
Select the following check boxes as required:
• Data Transfer – transfer files from a data collector.
• Differential Correction – differentially correct data files using base files from a local search, Internet search, or files that you select manually.
• Export – export corrected files using a sample export or one that you create.
• User Command – run another Windows or DOS program, command, or batch file once all other processes have stopped.
Tasks are performed in order, from top to bottom.
Project group
Select the following check boxes as required:
• Current project – selected by default.
• Selected project
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 321
Util
ities
![Page 324: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/324.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
To open a different project:
1. In the Project group, choose Selected project.
2. Click the drop-down arrow and choose a project from the list. The project you choose and its associated batch setup determine where export files will go.
3. Select the Allow files to be overwritten check box.
If you select this check box, the software overwrites existing files with the same name in the batch session. This includes transferred data collector files, differentially corrected files, and GIS and CAD format files.
The box is selected by default because the batch session will stop if it encounters a file that would otherwise be overwritten.
322 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 325: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/325.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Modify the Properties of an Existing Batch Setup
To modify the properties of an existing batch setup:
1. Click the drop down arrow and choose a batch setup from the list.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 323
Util
ities
![Page 326: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/326.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
2. Click Properties. The following dialog appears.
3. Select your settings in the Overview dialog.
4. Click Next to continue.
324 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 327: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/327.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Delete a Batch Setup
To delete an existing batch setup:
1. Click the drop-down arrow and choose a batch setup from the list.
2. Click Delete.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 325
Util
ities
![Page 328: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/328.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
23.2.10 Data Transfer
Include the Data Transfer option if you want to transfer files from a data collector.
The Device window displays the data collector you have connected to your computer for data transfer.
Select one of the following options:
Choose... to...
Transfer all files transfer all files from your data collector to your office computer.
Transfer new and updated files
transfer only new and updated files from your data collector to your office computer.
Select files manually select files manually once you run the Batch Processor utility. For more information see Select input files manually.
326 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 329: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/329.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Select Input Files Manually
If you chose to select input files manually in the batch setup, once you click Run in the Batch Setup window the following dialog appears:
1. Click the drop-down arrow and browse through the available folders.
2. Select one or more files from the list of filenames.
3. When the desired files are selected, click Open.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 327
Util
ities
![Page 330: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/330.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Differential Correction
To differentially correct data files using base files from a local search, Internet search, or files you select manually:
1. Select one of the following options:
2. Click Settings to display the Differential Correction Options dialog.
Choose... to...
Local Search for base files
automatically select base files from the base file folder of the project associated with the current batch setup.
Internet Search for base files
automatically select files according to your Internet connection settings. For more information on Internet settings see Internet Search in the Differential Correction Help.
Select files manually
select base files once the Batch Processor utility is run
328 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 331: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/331.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Differential Correction Options Dialog
Processing group Table 23.1 shows the available options.
Corrected files group Differentially corrected files are given the filename extension .cor by default. If you want a different filename extension, type it into the File Extension window.
Table 23.1 Processing group options
Option... Description
Smart Code and Carrier Phase Processing
Rover files will be differentially corrected first. Any files with carrier data will then be processed for carrier phase correction. This is the default setting.
Code Processing only Rover files will be differentially corrected only, regardless of the content of the data files.
Carrier Phase Processing only
Rover files will be carrier phase processed only.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 329
Util
ities
![Page 332: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/332.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Reference Position group Select one of the following options:
Note – If the reference positions in all base files do not match, an error will occur and the Batch Processor utility will stop.
Click Advanced to display the Differential Correction Settings dialog.
23.2.11 Differential Correction Settings Dialog
Output tab The tab appears as follows:
Choose... to...
From base files use the reference position from locally selected or Internet selected base files (which is unknown until the base files are actually selected).
Check same as last session
use the reference position selected in the last-used batch setup.
330 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 333: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/333.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
The fields in this tab are described in the following sections.
Output Positions group Select one of the following options:
Audit File group Specify what you want written to the audit files. If differential correction is unsuccessful, you can use these files to help determine why. Select one of the following options:
Choose... to...
Corrected Only output only corrected positions and velocities records.
Corrected and Uncorrected
output both corrected and uncorrected positions and velocities records.
Choose... to...
None produce no audit file.
Standard produce a standard audit file showing basic information about the differential correction session.
Expanded produce an expanded file showing step-by-step information about the differential correction session.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 331
Util
ities
![Page 334: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/334.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Base Options tab The tab appears as follows:
The fields in this tab are described in the following sections.
Reference Confirmation group Select one of the following options:
Choose... to...
Always Required always display the reference position dialog after selecting base files.
Not Required if Identical to Previous Session
display the reference position dialog only if the reference position in all selected base files is not the same as that used in the previous session.
332 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 335: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/335.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Filter Minimums group Select one of the following options:
Code Processing tab This tab appears as follows:
Choose... to...
Elevation filter out any data from satellites below the specified height above the horizon.
Note – A value of 0 indicates no positions will be filtered out.
SNR filter out any data from satellites with a low signal to noise ratio.
Note – A value of 0 indicates no positions will be filtered out.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 333
Util
ities
![Page 336: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/336.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
The fields in this tab are described in the following sections.
Rover Processing group
• Rover Processing Technique Select one of the following options.
• Base Processing Technique group Select settings in this group to improve results when the base station data is noisy or of unusually low quality. Select one of the following options.
Choose... to...
Standard standard step-by-step processing.
With Velocity Filtering smooth out any large leaps or spikes in velocity data recorded when mobile and in a multipath environment.
Check Velocity Records check box
differentially correct any velocity records in rover files.
Correct Real-time DGPS Positions check box
improve the accuracy of real-time corrected positions.
Choose... to...
Standard standard step-by-step processing.
With Filtering filter base station data, and provide additional information for the base audit file.
With Filtering and Smoothing
filter and smooth base station data.
334 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 337: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/337.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Zipped Files tab This tab appears as follows:
Select one of the following options.
Choose... to...
Delete Zipped files after processing
only zipped files are deleted. Has no effect on selected base files that are not zipped.
Delete Unzipped files after processing
only unzipped base files are deleted. During processing, base files are unzipped. Has no effect on selected base files that are zipped.
Overwrite existing files when unzipping
allow existing files of the same name to be overwritten when unzipping base files. Has no effect if the selected base files are not zipped. The box is selected by default because the batch session will stop if it encounters a file that would otherwise be overwritten.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 335
Util
ities
![Page 338: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/338.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Select base files manually
If you chose to select base files manually in the batch setup, once you click Run in the Batch Setup window the following dialog appears.
Note – If you also chose to select input files manually, the Select Files to Process dialog appears before the Select Base Files dialog.
1. Click the drop-down arrow and browse through the available folders.
2. Select one or more files from the list of filenames.
3. When the desired files are selected, click Open.
336 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 339: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/339.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Export
Export corrected files using a sample export setup, or one that you create.
To use an export setup, do one of the following:
• Click New to create your own export setup.
• Click Modify to modify the properties of an existing export setup.
• Click Delete to delete an export setup.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 337
Util
ities
![Page 340: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/340.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Create a New Export Setup
To create a new export setup:
1. Click New in the Export Setup group to display the New setup dialog.
2. In the Create group, do one of the following:
– Select the New setup option and then click the drop-down arrow. Select a named setup from the list. The name of your new setup will appear in the Setup Name window at the top of the dialog as New <selected setup name>. Click OK to display the Export Setup dialog.
338 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 341: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/341.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
– Select the Copy of existing setup option and then click the drop-down arrow. Select a named setup from the list. The name of your new setup will appear in the Setup Name window at the top of the dialog as Copy of <selected setup name>. You can highlight the name and change it. Click OK to display the Export Setup dialog.
Export Setup dialog
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 339
Util
ities
![Page 342: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/342.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
To configure the export settings:
1. Select each tab in turn and specify the settings that you need. If the selected format has other properties that you need to set, an extra tab appears. This tab contains controls for selecting options that are specific to this format, as shown in Table 23.2.
2. Click OK to return to the Export dialog.
Table 23.2 Extra Export Settings tab
Format Tab
ArcView Shapefile Shape Options Tab
AutoCAD DXF DXF Options Tab
Configurable ASCII ASCII Options Tab
DBASE DBASE Options Tab
Microstation DGN DGN Options Tab
340 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 343: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/343.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Modify the properties of an existing export setup
To change the export setup or the export directory:
1. In the Export Setup group, click Modify to display the Export Setup dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 341
Util
ities
![Page 344: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/344.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Delete an Export Setup
To delete an existing export setup:
1. Click the drop-down arrow and select a named export setup from the list.
2. Click Delete.
342 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 345: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/345.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
User command
Use this command to run another Windows or DOS program, command, or batch file once all other processes have stopped.
Use this dialog to:
• Type in a User Command
• Browse folders for a User Command
To type in a user command:
1. In the Command Line field, type the path and filename of the program, command, or batch file that you want to run after all other processes have stopped.
2. Click Finish to return to the Batch Setup dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 343
Util
ities
![Page 346: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/346.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
To Browse folders for a User Command from a list of programs or files:
1. Click Browse to select the program or filename from the Select Program dialog, as shown below:
2. Select a program or file from the list of filenames.
344 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 347: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/347.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
3. Click Open to confirm your selection and return to the Batch Setup Properties dialog. The selected program file appears in the Command Line field.
4. Click Finish to return to the Batch Setup dialog.
Batch Processor Log Window
This section describes the Batch Processor Log window.
When you run a batch setup or a batch setup is started by the Connection Manager utility, the following window appears:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 345
Util
ities
![Page 348: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/348.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
When a batch operation is in progress, this window contains a log of the sequence of events in the batch session. As each different part of the session runs, the log file is updated. Refer to this log file once the batch session has finished to confirm that everything was processed as expected. If problems occurred during batch processing, they are described here.
There are two levels of detail that can be displayed in the log window:
• The summary level shows key processes and results for the session. This level is adequate for most batch processing sessions.
• The detail level shows the summary level detail plus additional parameters used during the processing. If problems occurred during batch processing, it may be necessary to view the information in this level to determine what went wrong.
Use the View / Show Summary and View / Show Details menu commands to switch between these two levels of detail.
The log window can also display the time at which each task was carried out during the batch session. Use the View / Show Times command to switch times on and off.
Note – The log file created during a batch session is not automatically saved when you exit the Batch Processor utility.
The contents of the log window can be saved to a file or copied to the clipboard for pasting into another application. Select File / Save Log As to save the log to a file, or File / Copy log to clipboard to copy the contents of the log to the clipboard. The saved or copied information will reflect the current level of detail and times being displayed.
346 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 349: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/349.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
The following sections describe each component of the window.
Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for convenient access to frequently used operations. Most of the tools have an equivalent accelerator key for keyboard users.
Table 23.3 shows the keyboard and menu equivalents of the tools.
B Tip – If you are not sure what a button on the toolbar does, briefly hold the mouse pointer over the button. A Tool Tip appears next to the button, describing the command it represents. The status bar also changes to show a more detailed description of the command.
Table 23.3 Keyboard and Menu Equivalents of Tools
Tool Button Keyboard Menu
Run [Ctrl] + [R] File / Run
Stop [Ctrl] + [S] File / Stop
Batch Setup [Ctrl] + [B] File / Batch Setup
Print Log [Ctrl] + [P] File / Print
Save Log As [Ctrl] + [A] File / Save Log As
Copy log to clipboard
[Ctrl] + [C] File / Copy log to clipboard
Show Summary [Ctrl] + [U] View / Show Summary
Show Details [Ctrl] + [D] View / Show Details
Show Times [Ctrl] + [I] View / Show Times
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 347
Util
ities
![Page 350: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/350.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Status Bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the window:
On the left, the message For Help, press [F1] is usually displayed. This changes as you move the cursor over a menu command, or hold the mouse pointer over a button on the toolbar, to give a one-line description of the command, as shown above.
On the right, the name of the current batch setup is displayed. This area is sometimes called the system tray.
23.2.12 File Menu
This section describes the commands in the File menu.
Batch Setup Select this command to set the parameters for a batch setup. This takes you through the process of setting up and running a batch session. See Using the Batch Processor Utility, page 307, for a step-by-step description of the Batch Setup process.
The Batch Setup dialog appears automatically when the Batch Processor utility is started. By default, it displays the last-used named batch setup.
Run Select this command or click the Run tool to start a batch processing session using the settings in the current named batch setup.
Stop Select this command or click the Stop tool to stop a batch session while it is running. The session will halt immediately.
348 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 351: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/351.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Save Log As Select this command or click the Save As tool to save the currently displayed log to a file. The following dialog appears:
Type in a name for the log file and click Save.
Copy Log to Clipboard Select this command to copy the batch log to the clipboard. You can then paste the log into another Windows application such as a text editor.
Alternatively, you can save the log directly to a file with the File / Save Log As command, and open it with another Windows application such as a text editor.
Set Printer Font Select this command to set the font used by the printer to print the log.
Print Log On Completion Select this command to print the log at the completion of the batch process.
Print Select this command or click the Print tool to print the log.
Exit Select his command to exit the Batch Processor utility.
Note – The batch log is not automatically saved when you exit the Batch Processor utility. Select File / Save Log As to save the log to a file, or File / Copy log to clipboard to copy the log to the clipboard.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 349
Util
ities
![Page 352: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/352.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
23.2.13 View Menu
Use this menu to hide or show the Toolbar, Status Bar and the following items:
Show Summary Select this command click on the Show Summary tool to display a summary of the batch log. As each step in the batch session finishes, the result is displayed in the log. Only the most important commands and results are displayed. An example of a summary log is shown below.
350 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 353: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/353.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Show Details Select this command or click on the Show Details tool to display the batch log in detail. As each step in the batch session finishes, the result is displayed in the log. An example of a detailed log is shown below:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 351
Util
ities
![Page 354: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/354.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility
Util
ities
Show Times Select this command or click on the Show Times tool to display time information in the log. The time is shown for each command, error, or result that occurs in the batch session. An example of a log that includes time information is shown below:
23.2.14 Help Menu
This section describes the controls in the Help menu.
The Help menu provides access to the Batch Processor utility Help commands, as well as to the standard About Batch Processor utility window.
Contents Select this command and the Contents page of the help file appears.
352 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 355: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/355.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – The Batch Processor Utility 23
Search for Help On When you select this command, the following dialog appears:
To display information for a specific topic, type in a word or select an index entry. Click Display to see the selected help topic.
Using Help Select this command to display the standard Microsoft Windows How to Use Help information.
About The Batch Processor utility Select this command to display the About Batch Processor dialog. This dialog displays the Batch Processor utility software version number as well as copyright and licensing information.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 353
Util
ities
![Page 356: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/356.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility
Util
ities
23.3Grouping UtilityIf your data collector does not support data dictionaries, or for some reason you do not want to work with a data dictionary, the Grouping utility provides you with a way of grouping a series of GPS positions into features that can be recognized by GPS Pathfinder Office. The Grouping utility scans a set of data files that were collected without a data dictionary, and creates a new data file composed of features.
Topics in this section include:
• When to use the Grouping utility
• Starting the Grouping utility
• Using the Grouping utility
• Exiting the Grouping utility
• A description of the Grouping utility main window
23.3.1 When to Use the Grouping Utility
If your data collector does not support data dictionaries, or if for some reason you do not want to work with a data dictionary, the Grouping utility provides you with a way of grouping GPS positions into features that can be recognized by GPS Pathfinder Office. You can also use it to convert Not In Feature GPS positions into features.
The Grouping utility scans a set of data files and creates a new data file composed of features. Although the data is usually collected without a data dictionary and therefore contains no features, data in files that contain features can be grouped.
You must collect data for this utility using one of the following methods:
• Multi-file method Collect each feature in a separate data file. Make a careful note on paper of which feature is in which file. It is recommended that files have a different prefix to distinguish points, lines, and areas.
354 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 357: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/357.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23
• One-file method Collect all features into a single file, leaving a distinct time break between each. An ideal time break is about half a minute or longer. This may result naturally, if you take a while to get from one feature to the next, or you may have to wait between features. If the time break is too short, you may not be able to distinguish it from breaks in the data file caused by too few satellites or high PDOP situations.
You must have features of only one type in one file. Separate point, line, and area features into separate files. When you group each file back in the office, you will have to group points, lines, and areas separately.
You can process several files created by this method in one grouping session.
All features created with the Grouping utility are real features; they can be displayed, edited, queried, and exported as if created with a data dictionary. It is recommended that you differentially correct the data before using this utility, although most features created with the Grouping utility can be differentially corrected.
Data files created by the Grouping utility have an automatically generated data dictionary. The list of features is as follows:
• Point_generic
• Line_generic
• Area_generic
Each feature type has a text attribute called “Comment”. This attribute details the source file and creation method of the feature. Using notes taken in the field during data collection, edit this attribute to indicate what the feature really represents.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 355
Util
ities
![Page 358: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/358.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility
Util
ities
23.3.2 Starting the Grouping Utility
Before you can start the Grouping utility, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the Grouping utility from within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Grouping utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Grouping from the menu bar.
To start the Grouping utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Grouping.
The main window of the Grouping utility appears:
356 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 359: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/359.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23
23.3.3 Using the Grouping Utility
This section provides you with a step-by-step explanation of how to use the Grouping utility.
To group raw GPS positions into features:
1. Select the input files. By default, the last-used set of files is selected for processing. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a set of data files the corrected files would be selected by default.
If you want to change the list of selected input files, click Browse. The Select Data Files dialog appears:
The selected data files are highlighted in the File name field. There are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
– Replace the list by clicking on a single file.
– Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 357
Util
ities
![Page 360: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/360.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility
Util
ities
– Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including that file will be selected or deselected.
Note – The data files you select must all contain features of the same type: points, lines, or areas. You can only create one file, containing features of one type, in one Grouping session.
2. Specifying a sort option is relevant only when multiple input files are selected. The sort option selected determines the order in which the input files are processed and the unique identifier associated with each resultant group of positions. Select the Chronologically option to process files based on start times, with earlier files processed first. This is the default. Select the Alphabetically option to process files using the name of each file to determine processing order. The files are processed in alphabetical order from A to Z, followed by numeric values for files named with a numeric value as their first character.
3. Specify the output file. By default, the output file is called grouped.ssf and will be created in the current project folder.
If you want to change the file name click Output File. The following dialog appears:
358 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 361: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/361.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23
Enter the new file name in the File name field. Select a different folder if necessary. Click Save to confirm your selection and return to the main Grouping window. The new file name is displayed in the Output File field.
4. Select a grouping method from the Grouping Method field.
Select the One group per input file option to create one feature from each input file. This is the multi-file method described in When to Use the Grouping Utility, page 354.
Select the Create groups separated by option to create features separated by a specified time break. You should enter a time in the Minimum time break field that is approximately the time that elapsed between collecting features. This is the one-file method described in When to Use the Grouping Utility, page 354.
5. Select the feature type to create in the Create Feature Type field.
6. Click OK to group the files.
If you selected Create groups separated by (plus some minimum time break) in the Grouping Method field, then the following dialog appears:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 359
Util
ities
![Page 362: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/362.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility
Util
ities
This dialog displays the groups that have been created. For more information see Confirm Groups Dialog, page 365.
7. Check that each group represents a feature.
If more than one feature is included in one group, you may need to repeat the grouping with a larger time break. Click Cancel to close the dialog. Specify a larger minimum time break, then group the data again.
Combine any groups that represent the same feature, and exclude any groups that you do not want. (You cannot combine groups across files.)
8. Click OK to accept the groups and create the output file.
A status bar appears and the operation begins. When it is complete, the following message appears:
9. Click OK to acknowledge the message. The Grouping utility closes.
23.3.4 Exiting the Grouping Utility
The Grouping utility closes automatically when an operation is successfully completed. If an error occurred, you can exit the program manually.
To exit the Grouping utility:
• Click Cancel. The Grouping utility closes.
360 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 363: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/363.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23
23.3.5 Grouping Utility Main Window
This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the Grouping utility.
When you start the Grouping utility the following window appears:
The fields and buttons in the Grouping dialog are described in the following sections.
Input Files This group contains the controls for selecting files for processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the Selected Files list are stored. By default, this points to the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 361
Util
ities
![Page 364: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/364.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility
Util
ities
The Selected Files window lists the files that have been selected for processing in the current session. By default, the last-used set of files are selected as input files. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a set of data files the corrected files would appear in this list by default.
The Browse button lets you change the list of selected input files. When you click it, the Select Data Files dialog appears:
The selected data files are highlighted in the File name field. There are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
• Replace the list by clicking on a single file.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including that file will be selected or deselected.
Note – The data files you select must all contain features of the same type: points, lines, or areas. You can create only one file, containing features of one type, in one Grouping session.
362 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 365: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/365.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23
Click Open to accept the highlighted files and return to the main window of the Grouping utility.
Sort Specify a sort option only when multiple input files are selected. The sort option selected determines the order in which the input files are processed and the unique identifier associated with each resultant group of positions. Select Chronologically to process files based on start times, with earlier files processed first. This is the default. Select Alphabetically to process files using the name of each file to determine processing order. The files are processed in alphabetical order from A to Z, followed by numeric values for files named with a numeric value as their first character.
Output File This field displays the file name that will be created from the grouping and averaging operation. By default, the output file is called grouped.ssf and will be created in the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder. Click Output File to change the file name. The following dialog appears:
Enter the new file name in the File Name field. Select a different folder if necessary. Click Save to confirm your selection and return to the main window of the Grouping utility. The new file name is displayed in the Output File field.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 363
Util
ities
![Page 366: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/366.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility
Util
ities
Grouping Method This options let you select the method for processing the input files. Table 23.4 shows the two options available:
Minimum time break Enter a time in the Minimum time break field that is approximately the time that elapsed between collecting features.
Create Feature Type This field allows you to select the feature type that will be created from the input files. Table 23.5 shows the options available:
Click OK to begin a grouping operation. If the Create groups separated by option is selected, the Confirm Groups dialog appears. If not, grouping commences immediately.
Table 23.4 Grouping Method options
Option Description
One group per input file Creates one group from each input file. You can turn each group into a feature of the type you specified.
Create groups separated by
Creates groups separated by time intervals. The time interval must be greater than the value in the Minimum time break field.
Table 23.5 Create Feature Type options
Option Description
Points Creates point features.
Lines Creates line features.
Areas Creates area features.
Positions Only Creates averaged positions instead of features. A single position will be created per input file, or per time-separated group. Note that the positions created by this option cannot be differentially corrected.
364 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 367: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/367.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23
Click Cancel to exit the Grouping utility. Any changes made will not be saved.
Click Help to access the on-line help system of the Grouping utility.
Confirm Groups Dialog
If you chose the grouping method that involves a minimum time break, the following dialog appears:
The beginning of a new file is marked by a dashed line with a path and file name. An already existing feature also appears as a dashed line with the feature classification, for example ‘point feature’.
Each of the other lines in the box represents a group. A group is a set of positions. A group is a feature, if you did not select Positions Only in the Grouping window.
Use this dialog to check that each group represents only one feature.
You can combine groups, exclude unwanted groups, or return to the main window and carry out the grouping again with different settings.
The columns in this dialog vary depending on the feature type you chose.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 365
Util
ities
![Page 368: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/368.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility
Util
ities
Minimum Time Break This field displays the time break that you specified. If it is too small or if there were some very long gaps between GPS positions that caused unwanted time breaks in the input files, some features may span more than one group. If it is too large, more than one feature may be included in one group. To alter the value in this field, return to the main window and edit the Minimum time break field.
Group This column numbers the groups in sequence. Parentheses around a group number indicate that the group has been excluded. If a group is combined, the column shows the numbers of both groups, separated by a comma or two dots.
Positions Use this column to check that each group has the correct number of positions. For example, if you collected 100 positions for each feature, make sure that the value for each group is 100.
Time Break This column indicates the time interval between the last position of this group and the first position in the next group. Make sure that the time break between each group is consistent with what you collected in the field. Remember that gaps are created when there are too few satellites or when there are high PDOP situations. If no value is displayed, there is no following group. This occurs, for example, at the end of a file or before an already existing feature.
Gap For point and line features, this column indicates the distance between the last position in this group and the first position in the next group. If no value is displayed, there is no following group. This occurs, for example, at the end of a file or before an already existing feature.
Make sure that the value for each group is consistent with what you collected in the field. For example, if each feature was a long distance apart, then a small value probably means that this group should be combined with the next group to make a single feature.
366 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 369: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/369.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility 23
Std Dev For point features, this column indicates the spread of positions within each group. Values are more accurate if the input files have been differentially corrected first. A group with a very large spread probably indicates that two or more features are combined in this group and that a smaller time interval needs to be specified. Note that if the file has not been differentially corrected, the spread for a single point feature may be up to 100 meters.
Standard deviation is not a measure of the accuracy of a point feature. It indicates the spread of positions that make up that feature and bears no relation to the absolute accuracy of these positions.
Length For line features, this column indicates the length of the line of positions in each group. Make sure that the value for each group is consistent with what was collected in the field.
Perimeter For area features, this column indicates the perimeter of the area formed from each group. Make sure that the value for each group is consistent with what was collected in the field.
Area For area features, this column indicates the area of the feature created from the positions in each group. Make sure that the value for each group is consistent with what was collected in the field.
Click Cancel to return to the main window of the Grouping utility. Do this if you need to specify a different time break, for example.
Combine To combine a group with the following group, highlight the group and click Combine. You can combine a group with a combined group. Groups cannot be combined across files or across existing features within a file.
Click Separate to separate the selected combined groups.
Click Exclude to exclude the highlighted group from the output file. You may want to exclude a group if it was a repeated feature or a mistake. Combined groups can be excluded. An excluded group is indicated by parentheses around the Group value. You cannot exclude file boundary entries or existing features within a file.
Click Include to include a previously excluded group.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 367
Util
ities
![Page 370: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/370.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Grouping Utility
Util
ities
Click OK to accept the groups and begin grouping the input files.
A progress bar indicates the status of the grouping and averaging operation. When the operation is complete the following message appears:
Click OK to acknowledge the message. The Grouping utility closes.
About the Grouping Utility
The About the Grouping Utility command displays the software version number as well as copyright and licensing information.
368 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 371: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/371.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23
23.4Combine UtilityThe Combine utility combines (concatenates) two or more data files into a single data file, making file management and editing easier if you often deal with large numbers of files. Although GPS Pathfinder Office lets you open multiple data files, you can only edit the data if you open a single data file.
B Tip – You do not need to combine files for differential correction or for exporting. You can select multiple base and multiple rover files for correction, and multiple files for exporting to a GIS.
Topics in this section include:
• Starting the Combine utility
• Using the Combine utility
• Exiting the Combine utility
• A description of the Combine utility main window
23.4.1 Starting the Combine Utility
Before you can start the Combine utility, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the Combine utility from within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Combine utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Combine from the menu bar.
To start the Combine utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Combine.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 369
Util
ities
![Page 372: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/372.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility
Util
ities
The main window of the Combine utility appears:
23.4.2 Using the Combine Utility
This section provides you with a step-by-step explanation of how to use the Combine utility.
C Warning – Differentially correct your data files before using the Combine utility. You may not be able to differentially correct the combined file.
370 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 373: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/373.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23
To combine a set of data files:
1. Specify the input files. By default, the last-used set of files are selected as input files. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a set of data files, the corrected files would be selected by default.
a. If you want to change the list of selected input files, click Browse. The Select Data Files dialog appears:
b. Select the input files, and click Open to return to the main window.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 371
Util
ities
![Page 374: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/374.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility
Util
ities
2. Specify the output file. By default, the output file is called combined.ssf and will be created in the current project folder.
a. If you want to change the file name click Output File. The following dialog appears:
b. Enter the new file name in the File name field. Select a different folder if necessary.
c. Click Save to confirm your selection and return to the main window. The new file name is displayed in the Output File field.
3. Select a sort method:
– Select Chronologically to sort the data files by time, putting the earliest first. This is the default and the recommended option.
– Select Alphabetically to sort the data files alphabetically by file name. This option may combine the input data files out of time sequence.
4. Click OK to combine the files.
372 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 375: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/375.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23
A progress bar appears and the operation begins. When the operation is complete the following message appears:
5. Click OK to acknowledge the message. The Combine utility closes.
23.4.3 Exiting the Combine Utility
The Combine utility closes automatically when an operation is completed successfully. If the operation was not successful and you do not want to repeat the process, exit the Combine utility manually.
To exit the Combine utility:
• Click Cancel. The Combine utility closes.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 373
Util
ities
![Page 376: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/376.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility
Util
ities
23.4.4 Combine Utility Main Window
This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the Combine utility.
When you start the Combine utility the following window appears:
The fields and buttons in the Combine utility main window are described in the following sections.
Input Files This group contains the controls for selecting files for processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the Selected Files list are stored. By default, this points to the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
The Selected Files window lists the files that have been selected for processing in the current session. By default, the last used set of files are selected. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a set of data files the corrected files would appear in this list by default.
374 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 377: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/377.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23
The Browse button lets you change the list of selected input files. The Select Data Files dialog appears:
The selected data files are highlighted in the File name list box. There are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
• Replace the list by clicking on a single file.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including that file will be selected or deselected.
Click Open to accept the highlighted files and return to the Combine Data Files window.
Output File This field displays the file name that will be created from the combine operation. By default, the name of the output file is combined.ssf and it is created in the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 375
Util
ities
![Page 378: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/378.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility
Util
ities
Click Output File to change the file name. The following dialog appears:
Enter the new file name in the File name field. Select a different folder if necessary. Click Save to confirm your selection and return to the Combine Data Files window. The new file name is displayed in the Output File field.
Sort This field allows you to select the sort method with which to process the input files. Table 23.6 shows the two options available:
Click OK to combine the selected input files.
Table 23.6 Sort options
Option Description
Chronologically Sorts the data files by time, putting the earliest first. This is the default and the recommended option.
Alphabetically Sorts the data files alphabetically by file name. This option may combine the input data files out of time sequence.
376 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 379: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/379.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Combine Utility 23
A status bar appears and the operation begins.:
When the operation is complete the following message appears:
Click OK to acknowledge the message. The Combine utility closes.
Click Cancel to exit the Combine utility. Any changes made will not be saved.
Click Help to access the online Help system of the Combine utility.
About the Combine Utility command
The About the Combine Utility command displays the software version number as well as copyright and licensing information.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 377
Util
ities
![Page 380: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/380.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor
Util
ities
23.5SSF Record EditorThe SSF Record Editor allows you to view Standard Storage Format (.ssf) files in detail and delete individual records. This utility is recommended only for troubleshooting or advanced users. It is much easier to edit features and attributes graphically in the GPS Pathfinder Office Map window.
The ability to alter the coordinates of a GPS position record is intentionally omitted. You can use the editor to delete or undelete a position, but you cannot change the coordinates of that position.
Note – Data files created by Trimble Pathfinder mapping products are in the SSF format. Not all SSF format files carry a .ssf file name extension. Other extensions include .cor, .phs, and .wpt.
23.5.1 Starting the SSF Record Editor
Before you can start the SSF Record Editor, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the SSF Record Editor from within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the SSF Record Editor from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Other / SSF Record Editor from the menu bar.
To start the SSF Record Editor from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / SSF Record Editor.
378 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 381: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/381.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23
23.5.2 Using the SSF Record Editor
When you start the SSF Record Editor, the following window appears:
The menu bar provides access to all of the functionality of the SSF Record Editor. The status bar displays a tip or instruction referring to the selected command. The uppermost panel of the screen shows the records in the open data file. The bottom panel displays additional information about the highlighted line. On the right side of the screen, a scroll bar and buttons can move you directly to the beginning or end of the file.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 379
Util
ities
![Page 382: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/382.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor
Util
ities
23.5.3 SSF Record Editor User Interface
The following sections provide a field-by-field description of each part of the main window of the SSF Record Editor.
File Menu
This menu groups together commands for managing files. Each command is described in the following sections.
Open Use this command to select the file to view. The following dialog appears:
Specify the file you wish to edit. By default the last-used file is selected. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a data file, the corrected file would be selected.
Note – Data files created by the Trimble Pathfinder Mapping products are SSF format files. Not all SSF format files carry a .ssf file name extension. other extensions include .cor, .phs, and .wpt.
380 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 383: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/383.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23
Save Use this command to save the current data file. You can save as many times as you like while editing the current data file. Select File / Save or click on the Save File tool to save the current data file.
Save As Use this command to save a copy of the current data file to a new file. Select File / Save As. The following dialog appears:
Select Save files as text to save the current data file as a text file.
Select Save deleted records to save records that have been deleted in the data file.
Select Save hidden records to save records not currently being viewed in the data file.
Click OK to continue with the current selection, the following dialog appears:
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 381
Util
ities
![Page 384: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/384.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor
Util
ities
Use this dialog to select the name, drive and folder of the file to which the current data file will be saved. If you have chosen to save the data file as a text file in the previous dialog, the file will have a .txt extension by default.
Print Use this command to send the current data file to the printer. Select File / Print or click on the Print tool. The Print dialog appears. This dialog varies depending on your selected printer.
Set Printer Font Use this command to select the printer font for printing data files. The standard Font dialog is displayed, allowing you to select the font name, type and size to be used. A sample of the font is displayed.
Properties Use this command to view the properties of the data file. Statistics such as file size and the number of records in the file are automatically generated. Select File / Properties. The following dialog appears:
Exit Select File / Exit to close the SSF Record Editor.
If the data file currently open has been modified, when you select this command you are prompted to save the data file before exiting the SSF Record Editor.
382 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 385: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/385.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23
23.5.4 Edit Menu
The Edit menu groups together commands for editing text and for searching for records in the data file. Each command is described in the following sections.
Copy Selected Records to Clipboard Use this command, or press [Ctrl]+[C] to copy the highlighted records to the clipboard.
Delete Selected Records Use this command, or press [Delete] to delete the highlighted records. All records in the data file can be deleted except the header and data dictionary records. If you want to delete the data dictionary records select Edit / Allow Data Dictionary Deletions.
Deleted records in the file (except for the header and data dictionary records) have the ignore flag set and display on the screen with an overstrike.
Deleted records are not removed from the file, but are ignored. They can be undeleted with the Undelete Record, or Undelete All Records commands. To permanently remove the deleted records from the file, select File / Save As and specify that deleted records are to be removed.
Undelete Selected Records Use this command, or press [Ctrl]+[U] to undelete the highlighted records.
If records are deleted and then Save As is used, those records are not recoverable because they are no longer in the file. This command only works on records that are visible with an overstrike.
Delete All Records Use this command to delete all records in the current data file. All records in the data file can be deleted except the header and data dictionary records. If you want to delete the data dictionary records select Edit / Allow Data Dictionary Deletions.
Deleted records in the file (except for the header and data dictionary records) have the ignore flag set and display on the screen with an overstrike.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 383
Util
ities
![Page 386: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/386.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor
Util
ities
Deleted records are not removed from the file, but are ignored. They can be undeleted with the Undelete Record, or Undelete All Records commands. To permanently remove the deleted records from the file, select File / Save As and specify that deleted records are to be removed.
Undelete All Records Use this command to undelete all deleted records in the data file.
If records are deleted and then Save As is used, those records are not recoverable because they are no longer in the file. This command only works on records that are visible with an overstrike.
Delete Positions Outside Features Use this command to delete all Not in feature positions from the data file.
Deleted records are not removed from the file, but are ignored. They can be undeleted with the Undelete Record, or Undelete All Records commands. To permanently remove the deleted records from the file, select File / Save As and specify that deleted records are to be removed.
C Warning – Do not use this option if the file contains quickmarks, or data recorded in quickmark mode will be lost.
Change Record Use this command to edit the selected Survey Station record. The following dialog appears:
In the Antenna Height field enter the amended antenna height in meters.
384 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 387: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/387.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23
In the Antenna Type field select the appropriate antenna type.
In the Height Code field select the appropriate height reference.
Click Default to set all fields to the default values.
Click OK to accept the amended settings and close the dialog.
This command is only available when a survey station record is selected.
Allow Data Dictionary Deletions Use this command to allow data dictionary records to be deleted from the data file. By default data dictionary records cannot be deleted from the data file.
Find By Record Type Use this command to search for occurrences of a particular type of record in the file. Select Edit / Find by Record Type, or click on the Find by Record Type tool. The following dialog appears:
In the Find field select the record type that you want to search for.
In the Direction field specify the direction in which the file should be searched. Select Up to search the file from the currently highlighted record to the beginning of the file. Select Down to search the file from the currently highlighted record to the end of the file.
Click Find Next or press [F3] to find the next occurrence of the record type specified in the Find by Record Type dialog.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 385
Util
ities
![Page 388: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/388.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor
Util
ities
23.5.5 View Menu
The View menu contains commands that affect the display of information. You can view and hide different record types and configure the display of the SSF Record Editor main window. each command is described in the following sections.
Records by Type Use this command to filter the data shown in the main window, so that only records of a particular type are displayed. Select View / Records by Type. The following dialog appears:
To hide a record type click on the check box with the mouse, or highlight the record type and press the spacebar, or highlight the record type and click Hide Selected.
Click Hide All to hide all record types in the data file.
Click OK to return to the main window with the parameters selected. Only the record types chosen will be displayed in the main window.
Note – The View Record by Type filter is combined with all other active filters to determine what is displayed in the main window. This means that if two or more filters are enabled, only records that meet the requirements of all filters will be displayed.
386 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 389: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/389.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23
Position Records by Status Use this command to filter the position records shown in the main window, so that only records with a particular GPS status are displayed. Select View / Position Records by Status. The following dialog appears:
Use the Minimum Satellites field to only display positions that were collected with a specified minimum number of satellites.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 387
Util
ities
![Page 390: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/390.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor
Util
ities
Table 23.7 shows the three options:
The Minimum Satellites field does not filter out positions that were created manually (without GPS). For example, all of the positions in a file created by the Import utility will pass through this filter successfully.
The Maximum PDOP field is used to filter out positions that are above a particular PDOP mask. Only positions with a PDOP less than or equal to this value will be displayed. This field only has an effect if DOP values are present in the data file.
Select Any to display all positions, regardless of PDOP value.
Note – It is good field practice to set and use the PDOP mask setting correctly in the data collector you are using. However, if mistakes are made, the Maximum PDOP field gives you another chance to filter out positions with a high PDOP. For more information on correct PDOP masks, see the operation manual for your data collector.
Maximum PDOP does not filter out positions that were created manually (without using GPS). For example, all of the positions in a file created by the Import utility will pass through this filter successfully.
Table 23.7 Minimum Satellites field options
Option Description
2D (3 or more SVs) Positions collected using 3 or more satellites will be displayed.
3D (4 or more SVs) Positions collected using 4 or more satellites will be displayed. Positions collected in Manual 2D mode, or in Auto 2D/3D mode while only 3 satellites were available, will not be displayed.
3D (5 or more SVs) Positions collected using 5 or more satellites will be displayed. Positions collected in Manual 2D, Auto 2D/3D or in Manual 3D mode when only 4 satellites were available, will not be displayed.
388 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 391: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/391.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23
Use the Include the Positions That Are group to filter positions based on their correction status. Any combination of options may be checked, as shown in Table 23.8.
Table 23.8 Include the Positions That Are group options
Option Type of Position Displayed
Uncorrected Uncorrected positions will be displayed.
Non GPS Positions collected manually, or positions that were originally imported from a GIS or CAD system using the Import utility, will be displayed.
P(Y) Code Positions collected using P- or Y-code will be displayed. Only military receivers can compute or log positions using these codes.
Real-time WAAS The position has been differentially corrected using Real-time WAAS.
Real-time Differential
Positions collected using real-time DGPS will be displayed.
Differentially Corrected
Positions corrected with the Differential Correction utility will be displayed.
RTK Float The position has been collected as an RTK float position.
Phase Processed (Float)
Positions corrected using the Carrier Phase Processed option in the Differential Correction utility, achieving a float solution will be exported.
RTK Fixed Phase differential positions collected with survey-grade receivers (such as a Series 4000 receiver) will be displayed.
Phase Processed (Fixed)
Positions corrected using the Carrier Phase Processed option in the Differential Correction utility, achieving a fixed solution will be exported.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 389
Util
ities
![Page 392: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/392.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor
Util
ities
Records by Time Use this command to view only records that fall within a specified time period. Select View / Records by Time. The following dialog appears:
In the Start Time field enter the desired start time. The default is the first record in the file.
In the End Time field enter the desired end time. The default is the last record in the file.
Select Include this Period from the View group to display only records that fall within the specified start and end times.
Select Exclude this Period from the View group to display only records that do not fall within the specified start and end times.
Click Show All to reset the Start Time and End Time fields to the first and last records in the file.
Click OK to apply the filter to the displayed data file.
Split Use this command to adjust the layout of the SSF Record Editor main window. The splitter bar separates the main part of the window into two panels. The upper panel displays each record in the open data file in chronological order, while the bottom panel provides additional information about the highlighted record.
390 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 393: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/393.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF Record Editor 23
Select View / Split. The cursor jumps to the point where the two panels meet and changes to a . Use the up-arrow and down-arrow keys to adjust the size of the panels. To accept the position of the splitter bar, press Enter. Alternatively use the mouse to drag the splitter bar to the appropriate position.
Status Bar By default, the SSF Record Editor displays a status bar showing information about the SSF Record Editor. Select View / Status Bar to hide the status bar. The check mark beside the Status Bar command disappears, indicating that the status bar is hidden. To display the status bar again, select the command again.
Toolbar By default, the SSF Record Editor displays a toolbar with a number of tools for common operations. Select View / Toolbar to hide the toolbar. The check mark beside the Toolbar command disappears, indicating that the toolbar is hidden. To display the toolbar again, select the command again.
Help Menu This menu provides access to the standard About window. Select Help / About SSF Record Editor to display the About SSF Record Editor window.
This window provides important information about the SSF Record Editor version number and copyright.
Select ... to ...
open an existing document
save the active document
print a document
copy the selection and place it on the clipboard
find the specified record type
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 391
Util
ities
![Page 394: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/394.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files
Util
ities
23.6Check SSF FilesThe Check SSF Files utility checks a data or almanac file in SSF or COR format for invalid or corrupt position records. The utility looks at all records in the file and checks that values are valid and in the correct sequence, that the necessary information and variables are present, and that files are complete. A position record is considered invalid if one of the following conditions is met:
–π /2 > latitude > π /2
–π < longitude < π
–100000 meters > altitude > 100000 meters
23.6.1 Starting the Check SSF Files Utility
Before you can start the Check SSF Files utility, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the Check SSF Files utility from within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Check SSF Files utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Other / Check SSF Files from the menu bar.
To start the Check SSF Files utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Check SSF from the pop-up menu.
392 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 395: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/395.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23
The main window of the Check SSF Files utility appears:
23.6.2 Using the Check SSF Files Utility
This section provides you with a step-by-step explanation of how to use the Check SSF Files utility.
To check an SSF file for invalid or corrupt position records:
1. Specify the input files
By default, the last-used set of files are selected as input files. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a set of data files, the corrected files would be selected by default.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 393
Util
ities
![Page 396: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/396.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files
Util
ities
2. If you want to change the list of selected input files, click Browse. The Select Data Files dialog appears:
Select the input files, and click Open to return to the main window.
3. Select the repair options:
– Select the features you wish the Check SSF Files utility to use in processing the file(s):
– Select Fix corrupt records to ensure that any corrupt records that are found in the file are fixed.
– Select Remove records out of time sequence to remove positions records that are out of time sequence in the data file.
– Select Alter GPS Week Number to change the GPS week number. You must then specify whether the GPS week number should be updated automatically by the Check SSF Files utility, or manually, to specify the week number.
394 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 397: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/397.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23
– Select Add Precision records to create a precision record for each GPS position in the data file. The Data Transfer utility calculates precision records when the data file is transferred, so you need to use this option only if your files do not contain precision records.
4. Click OK to process the files.
When the operation is complete the following message appears:
5. Click More Details to see a detailed log file of the Check SSF Files operation. If errors were found in the data file and you are unsure why, check the log files.
6. Click Close to acknowledge the message and close this window.
23.6.3 Exiting the Check SSF Files Utility
The Check SSF Files utility does not close automatically when an operation is completed. The Check SSF Files utility must always be exited manually.
To exit the Check SSF Files utility:
• Click Cancel. The Check SSF utility closes.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 395
Util
ities
![Page 398: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/398.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files
Util
ities
23.6.4 Check SSF Files Utility Main Window
This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the Check SSF Files utility.
When you start the Check SSF Files utility the following window appears:
Input Files The Input Files group contains the controls for selecting files for processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the Selected Files list are stored. By default, this points to the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
The Selected Files window lists the files that have been selected for processing in the current session. By default, the last-used set of data files are selected. For example, if you had just differentially corrected a set of data files the corrected files would appear in this list by default, but you can change the selected input files if required.
396 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 399: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/399.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23
Repair Options This group allows you to select the action taken by the Check SSF Files utility if errors are found in the data files.
Note – The Data Transfer utility adds precision records when a data file is transferred to the computer, and the Differential Correction utility calculates precision records when a data file is corrected. You need to use this option only if the data file does not already contain precision records.
Click OK to check the selected input files.
A progress dialog displays during the time of processing.
Select... to...
Fix corrupt records have the Check SSF Files utility automatically fix any corrupt records it finds in the data file. When you use this option a new file is created without the bad position records. The new file has the same name as the original file except it substitutes an underscore (_) for the first letter of the file name. For example, if the file name is 01234567.SSF, the new file name is _1234567.SSF.
Remove records out of time sequence
have the Check SSF Files utility remove any records in the data files that occur out of sequence.
Alter GPS Week Number
have the Check SSF Files utility change the GPS week number in the data file. This may be required after August 22, 1999, when the GPS Week Number Rollover occurs.
Automatically have the Check SSF Files utility automatically alter the GPS week number.
Manually have the Check SSF Files utility change to the value specified in the Change To field.
Add Precision records have the Check SSF Files utility calculate a precision record for each GPS position in the data file.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 397
Util
ities
![Page 400: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/400.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files
Util
ities
When the operation is complete the following message appears:
Click More Details to see a detailed log file of the Check SSF Files operation. If errors were found in the data file and you are unsure why, check the log file.
Click Close to acknowledge the message and close this window.
Click Cancel to exit the Check SSF Files utility. Any changes made will not be saved.
398 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 401: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/401.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23
23.6.5 Change the Selected Input Files
1. Click Browse to change the list of selected input files. The following dialog appears:
2. The selected data files are highlighted in the File name field. There are several ways to replace or modify the selected list:
– Replace the list by clicking on a single file in the window, or holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on a number of files.
– Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
– Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including that file will be selected or deselected.
3. Click Open to accept the highlighted files and return to the Check SSF Files window.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 399
Util
ities
![Page 402: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/402.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files
Util
ities
23.6.6 Check SSF Files Log File
The Check SSF Files utility creates a log file with the following information.
SSF File Header Information The source of the file, including the receiver and data collector used, the reference position and the start and end time of the file.
Record Counts The different types of records in the data file.
Other Statistics The maximum and minimum height, latitude and longitude and a breakdown of the number of features of each type (point, line, area and quickmark) in the data file.
Summary Information A summary of the action taken in this Check SSF Files session.
An example log file
CHECKING FILE tutdata3.cor
*************************
*** SSF FILE HEADER INFORMATION ***
Version: 325
Source: -28416 (hex: FFFF9100)
Comment: MCORR400 v4.56 W32
Receiver Type: Pro XL
Data Recorder Type: Asset Survey PDT3300
Station Type: Rover
Reference:
Longitude: 121°59'56.063"W
Latitude: 37°24'45.075"N
Height: 15.443 meters
GPS Week Number: 849
Start Time: 20-Apr-1996 04:05:25
End Time: 20-Apr-1996 05:16:41
*** RECORD COUNTS ***
Total Records: 1171
400 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 403: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/403.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Check SSF Files 23
Deleted Records: 0
Position Records: 535
Precision Sigma: 535
Post Proc Corrected: 535
Real Time Corrected: 0
Survey Station Records: 4
Offset Records: 64
*** OTHER STATISTICS ***
Minimum Height: -30.512 meters
Maximum Height: -26.273 meters
Minimum Latitude: 37°24'38.222"N
Maximum Latitude: 37°24'53.025"N
Minimum Longitude: 122°00'01.544"W
Maximum Longitude: 121°59'37.525"W
Data Dictionary Entries: 79, Version: 4
Features: 64, Version: 4
Point: 56
Offset: 1
Line: 1
Area: 7
Quick Mark: 0
*** NOTE ***
File tutdata3.cor read successfully
****** SUMMARY INFORMATION ******
1 Input file was read
1171 Records Checked
No Errors Found to Fix
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 401
Util
ities
![Page 404: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/404.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility
Util
ities
23.7SSF to RINEX UtilityThe SSF to RINEX utility converts Trimble Standard Storage Format (.ssf) files into the Receiver INdependent EXchange (RINEX) format. You can use this utility to convert base station files produced by Trimble GPS receivers into the RINEX format, for use by non-Trimble applications.
23.7.1 Starting the SSF to RINEX Utility
Before you can start the SSF to RINEX utility, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the SSF to RINEX utility from within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the SSF to RINEX utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Other / SSF to RINEX from the menu bar.
To start the SSF to RINEX utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / SSF to RINEX.
402 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 405: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/405.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility 23
23.7.2 SSF to RINEX Utility Main Window
This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the SSF to RINEX utility.
When you start the SSF to RINEX utility the following window appears:
The fields and buttons in the SSF to RINEX utility Main Window are described in the following sections.
Input SSF Files This field contains the controls for selecting files for processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the Selected Files field are stored. By default, this points to the base files folder of the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 403
Util
ities
![Page 406: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/406.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility
Util
ities
The Selected Files field lists the files that have been selected for processing in the current session. To change the list of selected input files, click Browse. The following dialog appears:
There are several ways to select files:
• Click on a single file or drag the mouse down a series of files.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including that file will be selected or deselected.
Click Open to accept the selected files and return to the main window of the SSF to RINEX utility.
Output Folder This field displays the folder where the created files will be stored. By default, this is set to the base file folder of the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
404 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 407: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/407.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility 23
Note – Two output files are created by the SSF to RINEX utility for each input file, both with the same name as the input file, but with the extensions .obs and .nav.
To change the output folder click Browse. The following dialog appears:
To open a folder, click its plus sign or double click the folder. (Double-clicking an open folder closes the folder.) Select the output folder by clicking it. Click OK to confirm your selection. The path is displayed in the Output Folder field.
Click OK to begin the SSF to RINEX conversion operation.
A progress bar appears followed by the SSF To RINEX Configuration dialog.
Click Cancel to close the SSF to RINEX utility. Any changes made will not be saved.
Click Help to access the online help system of the SSF to RINEX utility.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 405
Util
ities
![Page 408: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/408.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility
Util
ities
23.7.3 SSF to RINEX Configuration Dialog
When you click OK to start the conversion from SSF to RINEX format, the following dialog appears:
Generally, these fields are for your reference only; you must enter something but what you enter does not affect the processing.
Antenna Marker This group contains the fields that enable you to identify the antenna marker. Enter a name and reference number for your antenna marker.
Names This group contains the fields that identify the observer. Enter the observer and agency names if appropriate.
Receivers This group contains the fields that identify the receiver. Enter the type, number, and version of your GPS antenna.
Antenna Position This group contains the fields for identifying the position of the GPS antenna.
The first field is supplied with the antenna height from the .ssf file. If the file does not contain an antenna height record, the previously used value is supplied. Heights are in the current altitude units. (Select Options / Coordinate System to access the unit settings.)
406 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 409: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/409.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – SSF to RINEX Utility 23
Note – You can only process a group of SSF files at one time if they use the same antenna height.
In the next two fields, enter the eccentricity of the antenna to the east of the marker, and to the north of the marker. Eccentricity values are in the current offset units. (Select Options / Units, in the GPS Pathfinder Office main program, to access the Units dialog.) The marker position is the same as the reference position in the header of the input SSF file.
Time Tolerance This field is used for processing old base files that do not contain carrier phase records. The Tolerance field is used to indicate the time at which a new epoch started. If time tolerance is not enabled, the SSF to RINEX utility uses .prn records to indicate a new epoch.
Select the Enable check box to enable grouping of measurement data based on a time tolerance. Enter the tolerance in seconds in the Tolerance field. By default, time tolerance grouping is disabled.
Note – All settings in the SSF To RINEX Configuration dialog are remembered the next time you run the SSF to RINEX utility.
Click OK to continue with the conversion. A progress bar appears, tracking the operation. The SSF to RINEX utility closes when the process is complete.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 407
Util
ities
![Page 410: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/410.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility
Util
ities
23.8Text Conversion UtilityThe Text Conversion utility converts text strings in data files from the ASCII character set used by Microsoft DOS to the Microsoft Windows ANSI (ISO 8859) character set, and vice versa.
You need this utility if you use extended or national characters in features, attributes, attribute values, and notes. Examples of these characters are:
• Latin characters with diacritics, for example á, ç, ü, ñ
• Letter shapes outside the standard upper and lowercase Latin characters A-Z, for example ø, ß, Þ
• Less commonly used symbols, for example §, ±, ²
Characters in the ANSI character set are displayed correctly in the GPS Pathfinder Office software. If characters do not appear correctly in this program, use the Text Conversion utility to convert from one character set to another.
23.8.1 Starting the Text Conversion Utility
Before you can start the Text Conversion utility, Microsoft Windows must be running on your computer and the GPS Pathfinder Office software must be installed. Start the Text Conversion utility from within GPS Pathfinder Office, or start it directly from Windows.
To start the Text Conversion utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software:
• Select Utilities / Other / Text Conversion from the menu bar.
To start the Text Conversion utility from Windows:
1. Click .
2. Select Programs / GPS Pathfinder Office <version> / Text Conversion.
408 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 411: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/411.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility 23
23.8.2 Text Conversion Utility Main Window
This section is a field-by-field description of the main window of the Text Conversion utility.
When you start the Text Conversion utility, the following window appears:
The fields and buttons in the Text Conversion utility main window are described in the following sections.
Input SSF Files This group contains the controls for selecting files for processing in the current session.
The Folder field shows the folder in which files that appear in the Selected Files field are stored. By default, this points to the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 409
Util
ities
![Page 412: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/412.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility
Util
ities
The Selected Files window contains the files that have been selected for processing in the current session. To change the list of selected input files, click Browse. The following dialog appears:
There are several ways to select files:
• Click on a single file.
• Add or remove individual files from the list by holding down [Ctrl] and clicking on the files.
• Extend or shorten the list by holding down [Shift] and selecting the last file that you want in the list. All files up to and including that file will be selected or deselected.
Click Open to accept the selected files and return to the main window of the Text Conversion utility.
Output Folder This field displays the folder where the converted files will be stored. By default, this is set to the data folder of the current GPS Pathfinder Office project folder.
410 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 413: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/413.jpg)
GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility 23
To change the output folder, click Browse. The following dialog appears:
To open a folder click its plus sign or double click the folder. (Double-clicking an open folder closes the folder.) Select the output folder by clicking it. Click OK to confirm your selection. The path is displayed in the Output Folder field.
Convert From Use this option to select the conversion direction.
DOS to Windows Use this option to convert text in the input file from the DOS ASCII character set to the Windows ANSI character set. Use this option if feature or attribute names, attribute values, or notes are not displayed correctly in GPS Pathfinder Office.
Windows to DOS Use this option to convert text in the input file from the Windows ANSI character set to the DOS ASCII character set. Use this option if feature or attribute names, attribute values, or notes display correctly in GPS Pathfinder Office but are to be used in a DOS-based program.
Click OK to begin the text conversion operation.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 411
Util
ities
![Page 414: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/414.jpg)
23 GPS Pathfinder Office Utilities – Text Conversion Utility
Util
ities
If text files may be overwritten, a warning dialog appears.
Click Yes to proceed, or No to cancel.
A progress bar appears, tracking the operation.
When the process is complete a dialog appears.
Click OK to dismiss the dialog and close the Text Conversion utility.
Click Cancel to close the Text Conversion utility.
Click Help to access the online help system of the Text Conversion utility.
About the SSF to RINEX Utility command
The About the SSF to RINEX utility command displays the software version number as well as copyright and licensing information.
412 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 415: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/415.jpg)
C H A P T E R
24
24 Standalone UtilitiesIn this chapter:
■ Introduction
■ Using the standalone utilities
■ ADJUST2D
■ ASTOSSF
■ DATREF
■ FOUR2SSF
■ LOAD
■ MULTIDAT
■ PFSTAT
■ RAWTOSSF
■ RPDD
■ SSFREF
■ SSFTOASC
![Page 416: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/416.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – Introduction
Util
ities
24.1IntroductionA number of standalone utility programs are included with GPS Pathfinder Office. These small programs are run from the DOS prompt. Some standalone utilities provide functions that are not available in the GPS Pathfinder Office main menu. Some provide functions that are available in the GPS Pathfinder Office software, so the utilities are an alternative method for performing the task.
The first part of this section provides instructions for using the utilities. The remainder of the section lists the utilities alphabetically and provides a description of what they do and how they are used.
414 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 417: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/417.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – Using the Standalone Utilities 24
24.2Using the Standalone UtilitiesYou need to know the following to use a standalone utility:
• A utility is run by typing the name of the utility at the DOS prompt. You do not need to start the GPS Pathfinder Office software to access it. Sometimes you need to type additional commands after the utility name if you want the utility to operate in a specific way. This is using a command line interface.
• The GPS Pathfinder Office installation procedure adds SET and PATH statements to your autoexec.bat file, so you can run the standalone utilities from any directory.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 415
Util
ities
![Page 418: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/418.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – Using the Standalone Utilities
Util
ities
Table 24.1 and Table 24.2 list the conventions used for describing the standalone utilities. Refer to these conventions when using a standalone utility.
C Warning – You should make copies of your data files and perform work only on the copies. Do not perform work on the original data files.
Table 24.1 Command Line Syntax
Item Convention
Angle Brackets Placeholders in angle brackets (<INPUT.EXT>) indicate where to type the name(s) of the required file(s) in the command line. Replace these with the name(s) of the actual data file(s). Do not include the angle brackets on the command line.
Wildcard Some standalone utilities accept a wildcard (* or ?), as part of the file name. If the program description does not specifically indicate that you can use a wildcard, the program does not accept a wildcard.
Table 24.2 Optional Command Conventions
Item Convention
Square Brackets Items in square brackets ([-a]) are optional and do not have to be included in the command line. Do not include the square brackets on the command line.
Forward Slash or Hyphen
When you use an option, it must be preceded by a forward slash (/) or a hyphen (-). You can use either. As a convention, options are listed with a hyphen.
416 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 419: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/419.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – ADJUST2D 24
24.3ADJUST2DIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 415, before you begin.
The ADJUST2D utility adjusts the altitude of 2D position records in a file. The (horizontal) location of a 2D position record is dependent upon the altitude that you entered in the field. (If you did not enter an altitude while collecting data in the field then the software uses the last altitude computed from a 3D fix.) If 2D data was collected with the wrong altitude, the positions can be recomputed based upon the new altitude supplied to the ADJUST2D utility.
Note – The altitude that is provided to the ADJUST2D utility must be in meters above the WGS-84 ellipsoid.
C Warning – When the altitude of 2D data is adjusted, the horizontal components of the positions are also adjusted. If an incorrect altitude is entered the resulting data is also incorrect in the horizontal components.
24.3.1 ADJUST2D Command Line Syntax
To use the ADJUST2D command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
ADJUST2D [OPTIONS] [-A <almanac file>] <HAE altitude> -I<filename.ext> -O<outfile.adj>
Example:
ADJUST2D -atest.alm 43.67 -r -IA032512B.COR-OA032512B.ADJ
ADJUST2D Name of the utility
<HAE altitude> HAE altitude, a numeric entry in meters. It must be included in the command line.
-I<filename.ext> Name of the input file, -I must be included.
-O<outfile.adj> Name of the output file, -O must be included.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 417
Util
ities
![Page 420: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/420.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – ADJUST2D
Util
ities
Table 24.3 lists the optional ADJUST2D commands.
Table 24.3 Optional ADJUST2D Commands
Command Description
-r Displays a report of how far each position record was shifted.
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-ver Displays the program version number and ID.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-yes Answers ‘yes’ to all questions.
-no Answers ‘no’ to all questions.
418 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 421: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/421.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – ASTOSSF 24
24.4ASTOSSFIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 415, before you begin.
The ASTOSSF utility converts an unprocessed Asset Surveyor raw logging file to an output SSF file. The program also adds the .ssf extension to the output file.
B Tip – This conversion is performed automatically when you transfer data collector files from a TSC1, TDC1, TDC2, or MC-V running Asset Surveyor using the Data Transfer utility. You will probably never have to use this standalone utility.
24.4.1 ASTOSSF Command Line Syntax
To use the ASTOSSF command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
ASTOSSF.EXE file
Example:
ASTOSSF R111111a
astossf.exe The utility name.
file The unprocessed Asset Surveyor raw logging file.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 419
Util
ities
![Page 422: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/422.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – DATREF
Util
ities
24.5DATREFIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 415, before you begin.
The DATREF utility modifies the reference position of any DAT file. Use this standalone utility to correct the reference position of a base file before performing any differential correction. You should set the reference position from within GPS Pathfinder Office. Then the position can be entered in latitude/longitude, UTM coordinates, or U.S. State Plane coordinates.
C Warning – The reference position must be entered in the WGS-84 datum and the latitude/longitude coordinate system.
B Tip – The Differential Correction utility automatically prompts you to confirm the reference position of any base files used for differential correction. It is not necessary to use DATREF for this purpose.
24.5.1 DATREF Command Line Syntax
To use the DATREF command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
DATREF <filename.DAT> [OPTIONS]
DATREF The utility name.
<filename.DAT> The DAT format input file.
420 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 423: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/423.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – DATREF 24
Table 24.4 lists the optional DATREF commands.
Table 24.4 Optional DATREF Commands
Command Description
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-help As above.
-ver Displays the version number of this program.
-lat Lets you enter the latitude at the command line. Latitude is in degrees, minutes, and seconds (for example, 34 24 45.5).
-lon Lets you enter the longitude at the command line. Longitude is in degrees, minutes, and seconds (for example, -122 16 35.5).
-alt Lets you enter the altitude at the command line. Altitude is in meters (for example, 100.3).
-ant Lets you enter the antenna height at the command line. Antenna height is in meters (0 to 99.9 meters).
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 421
Util
ities
![Page 424: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/424.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – FOUR2SSF
Util
ities
24.6FOUR2SSFIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 415, before you begin.
The FOUR2SSF utility converts Trimble Series 4000 receiver files to SSF files.
You must type the .dat extension of the input data file name. You can give the output file any name and extension you want. If you do not specify a name for the output file, it will have the same name as the .dat file but with an .ssf extension.
This function is not available in the GPS Pathfinder Office software main menu.
24.6.1 FOUR2SSF Command Line Syntax
To use the FOUR2SSF command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
FOUR2SSF [OPTIONS] <INPUTFILE.DAT> [OUTFILE.SSF]
Example:
FOUR2SSF -wn634 -ion 4000BASE.DAT
FOUR2SSF The utility name.
<INPUTFILE.DAT> The input file name, a Trimble Series 4000 receiver file.
[OUTFILE.SSF] The output file name.
422 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 425: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/425.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – FOUR2SSF 24
Table 24.5 lists the optional FOUR2SSF commands.
Table 24.5 Optional FOUR2SSF Commands
Command Description
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-ver Displays the program version number and ID.
-yes Answers ‘yes’ to all questions asked by FOUR2SSF.
-no Answers ‘no’ to all questions asked by FOUR2SSF.
-1a Outputs the older-style position record (pre- Release 2.0 positions).
-wn<int> You must supply a three-digit week number when invoking this option. You are telling FOUR2SSF to use the following three-digit number as the week number during processing.
-ion Causes FOURSSF to use *.ION files as ionospheric data source.
-3d Causes FOURSSF to perform only 3D position processing.
-oldprn Used with older-style PRN records.
-oldmeas Used with older-style measurement records.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 423
Util
ities
![Page 426: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/426.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – LOAD
Util
ities
24.7LOADIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The LOAD utility transfers data files from the data logger to the office computer. When the data files are transferred to the office computer using the LOAD utility, they are automatically converted to the SSF format.
To transfer data files from the data logger to the office computer using the LOAD utility:
1. Connect the supplied download cable to your data collector.
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the selected COM port on the office computer.
3. On the office computer, switch to the directory where the file will be located.
4. Enter the LOAD <filename> command at the DOS prompt on the office computer and press [Enter].
Note – Files on a PATHLOG data collector require a .T extension, for example LOAD <filename.T>
The file is transferred and converted. Both the original data logger file and the .ssf file are in the directory.
B Tip – The Data Transfer utility is a more flexible way of transferring data between a data collector and your office computer. Use this program in preference to LOAD where possible. For batch purposes, the Batch Processor supports the automatic download of data from a data collector, as well as differential correction and export of that data.
424 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 427: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/427.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – LOAD 24
24.7.1 LOAD Command Line Syntax
To use the LOAD command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
LOAD [OPTION] <OUTPUT.EXT>
Example:
LOAD A082215B.T
OR:
LOAD A082215B
The option -ALL will get all files.Example:
LOAD -ALL
LOAD The utility name.
<output.ext> The name of the file you want to transfer from the GPS receiver to the PC.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 425
Util
ities
![Page 428: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/428.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – LOAD
Util
ities
Table 24.6 lists the optional LOAD commands.
Table 24.6 Optional LOAD Commands
Command Description
-com1 Causes LOAD to use COM1 (instead of COM2).
-com2 Causes LOAD to use COM2 (instead of COM1).
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-ver Displays the utility version number and ID.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-all Downloads all files.
-ana Saves an ASCII log file called COMM.LOG.
-yes Answers ‘yes’ to all questions asked by LOAD.
-no Answers ‘no’ to all questions asked by LOAD.
426 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 429: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/429.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – MULTIDAT 24
24.8MULTIDATIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The MULTIDAT utility combines several Series 4000 receiver DAT files into one DAT file. This file can then be used with the Differential Correction utility.
Note – There is no need to use MULTIDAT to combine DAT files for use in the Differential Correction utility. Multiple base files can be selected, and are combined internally.
24.8.1 MULTIDAT Command Line Syntax
To use the MULTIDAT command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
MULTIDAT [options] <input files> -o<output file>
Example:
MULTIDAT -t *.DAT -oBASE0714.DAT
MULTIDAT The utility name.
<input files> The name of the input file(s).
<output file> The name of the output file.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 427
Util
ities
![Page 430: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/430.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – MULTIDAT
Util
ities
Table 24.7 lists the optional MULTIDAT commands.
Table 24.7 Optional MULTIDAT Commands
Command Description
-time Sorts file names chronologically.
-t Sorts file names chronologically.
-alpha Sorts file names alphabetically.
-a Sorts file names alphabetically. Default sort - None.
-nosort Do not sort the files. Default sort - chronologically.
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-ver Displays the utility ID only.
-o<outfile> Specifies the name of the combined output file to be created.
-yes Answers ‘yes’ to all questions.
-no Answers ‘no’ to all questions.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
428 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 431: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/431.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – PFSTAT 24
24.9PFSTATIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The PFSTAT utility displays the following statistics on the input file:
• maximum position in the file
• minimum position in the file
• standard deviation of positions in the file
• mean position of the file
• the number of position records in the file
• the start and end times of the file
• whether the file contains velocity of DOP data
The PFSTAT utility only displays the statistics stored within the file. To recalculate the statistics, run the utility with the -f option.
24.9.1 PFSTAT Command Line Syntax
To use the PFSTAT command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
PFSTAT [options] <INPUT.EXT>
Example:
PFSTAT -f TREEFILE.SSF
PFSTAT The utility name.
<INPUT.EXT> The name of the file for which you want to calculate statistics.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 429
Util
ities
![Page 432: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/432.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – PFSTAT
Util
ities
Table 24.8 lists the optional PFSTAT commands.
Table 24.8 Optional PFSTAT Commands
Command Description
-f Forces recalculation of statistics.
-noid Suppresses the display of the ID message.
-silent Suppresses the display of any message.
-ver Displays the utility ID only.
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options.
430 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 433: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/433.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – RAWTOSSF 24
24.10RAWTOSSFIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The RAWTOSSF utility converts raw data files from the data collector format (PATHLOG, Pathfinder Basic series, or GeoExplorer I and II) to the GPS Pathfinder Office SSF format. You will probably never need to use this standalone utility, as the normal methods of transferring data files to the PC automatically convert the files to the SSF format.
B Tip – This conversion is performed automatically when you transfer data collector files using the Data Transfer utility.
24.10.1 RAWTOSSF Command Line Syntax
To use the RAWTOSSF command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
RAWTOSSF <INPUTFILE.EXT>
Example:
RAWTOSSF A053104B.T
RAWTOSSF The utility name.
<input.ext> The name of the data collector file. A ‘.T’ extension indicates PATHLOG files.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 431
Util
ities
![Page 434: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/434.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – RPDD
Util
ities
24.11RPDDIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The RPDD utility removes the data dictionary from an SSF file and replaces it with a user-specified data dictionary. Alternatively, a new data dictionary can be combined with the existing data dictionary instead of replacing it.
This function is not available in the GPS Pathfinder Office main menu.
24.11.1 RPDD Command Line Syntax
To use the RPDD command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
RPDD INFILE.SSF NEWDD.DDF [options]
Example:
RPDD JOKER.SSF NEWDD.DDF -a
Table 24.9 lists the optional RPDD commands.
RPDD The utility name
joker.ssf The name of the .ssf file
newdd.ddf The name of the user specified data dictionary
Table 24.9 Optional RPDD Commands
Command Description
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options
-help Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options
-ver Displays version number of this program
-a Appends the new data dictionary file instead of replacing the existing data dictionary
432 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 435: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/435.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – SSFREF 24
24.12SSFREFIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The SSFREF utility modifies the reference position of any SSF file. Use this standalone utility to correct the reference position of a base file before performing any differential correction.
C Warning – The reference position must be entered in the WGS-84 datum and the latitude/longitude coordinate system.
You should set the reference position from within GPS Pathfinder Office. Then the position can be entered in latitude/longitude, UTM coordinates, or U.S. State Plane coordinates.
B Tip – The Differential Correction utility automatically prompts you to confirm the reference position of any base files used for differential correction. It is not necessary to use SSFREF for this purpose.
24.12.1 SSFREF Command Line Syntax
To use the SSFREF command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
SSFREF <INPUT.SSF> [options]
Example:
SSFREF BASE0617.SSF
SSFREF The utility name.
<input.ssf> The name of the file for which you want to change the reference position.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 433
Util
ities
![Page 436: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/436.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – SSFREF
Util
ities
Table 24.10 lists the optional SSFREF commands.
Table 24.10 Optional SSFREF Commands
Command Description
-? Displays a help screen listing the usage and all options
-help As above
-ver Displays the version number of this program
-show Shows only the present reference of the file
-m Mean sea level for altitude, default Ellipsoid
-lat Lets you enter the latitude at the command line Latitude is in degrees, minutes, and seconds(for example, 34 24 45.5)
-lon Lets you enter the longitude at the command line. Longitude is in degrees, minutes, and seconds (for example, -122 16 35.5)
-alt Lets you enter the altitude at the command line. Altitude is in meters (for example, 100.3)
-ant Lets you enter the antenna height at the command line. Antenna height is 0 to 99.9 meters
434 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 437: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/437.jpg)
Standalone Utilities – SSFTOASC 24
24.13SSFTOASCIf this is the first time you have used a standalone utility please see Using the Standalone Utilities, page 338, before you begin.
The SSFTOASC utility inputs an SSF file and outputs time, position, and altitude to an ASCII format. The units are WGS-84 in meters. The output file name is the same as the input, except the extension is changed to .asc. This function lets you use a DOS batch file to convert SSF files to ASCII format.
This function is not available in the GPS Pathfinder Office main menu.
24.13.1 SSFTOASC Command Line Syntax
To use the SSFTOASC command, enter the following at the DOS prompt:
SSFTOASC [flag] <filename>
SSFTOASC The utility name.
[Flag] The flag name.
<filename> The name of the input and output file.
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 435
Util
ities
![Page 438: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/438.jpg)
24 Standalone Utilities – SSFTOASC
Util
ities
Table 24.11 lists the optional SSFTOASC commands.
Table 24.11 Optional SSFTOASC Commands
Command Description
-silent Suppresses the display of any messages.
-v Outputs velocity, East, North, Up, in meters/sec.
-d Outputs decimal degrees, latitude, longitude, and altitude.
-u Outputs UTM, Easting, Northing, and altitude.
-noalt Does not output altitude.
-revll Reverses order of latitude and longitude (or Northing and Easting).
-nad27 Converts from WGS-84 to NAD-27.
-moss Outputs in PC-MOSS format.
-gpstime Shows time as week number, time of week.
-time3 Shows time to 3 decimal places.
-meas Shows raw measurements: PRN, SNR, Code Phase, Doppler, and Sample Length.
436 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 439: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/439.jpg)
Index
Symbols.cor filesspecifying location of 256
.nav files 404
.obs files 404
.ssf filesconverting to RINEX format 402searching for a particular record
type 385selecting to differentially correct 252settings for converting to RINEX 406
.zip filessettings for 285
Numerics
2D position recordsadjusting 417
A
accuracy of dataimproving using the Centimeter
Processing Option 236synchronized measurements 230, 231types of errors that can be
removed 294ADJUST2D utility 417
adjustingaltitude of 2D position records 417
adjustmentsconfirming 275
antenna heightsetting from a base file 274
automaticallytransferring files 26
B
base filesconfirming 245confirming selected 271local search for 259overview 235processing options 279recommended logging intervals 231searching for 254searching on computer for 244selecting to process rover files 240setting antenna height 274setting reference position 274
base stationdistances to roving receiver 228settings 265
base station providerdeleting from list 262displaying currently-selected 262file name structure 266information about 263
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 437
![Page 440: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/440.jpg)
Index
Internet security details 270selecting 289setting a new provider 261setting details of 262, 290setting Internet address of 266
Batch Processorclosing 317starting 305steps involved in processing files 307
Batch Processor Interface 317Batch Processor Log window 345Batch Settings wizard
step 1selecting tasks 309
step 2setting up data transfer 312
step 3differential correction 313, 314
step 4exporting files 315
step 5running another program 316
beep volume settings 48
C
carrier phase processingand centimeter processing 236and differentially correcting 235distance between base station and
roving receiver 228options when differentially correcting
files 257types of errors 295
Centimeter Processing Optionsusing to improve accuracy of
data 236changing
input files 399survey station record 384, 385
Check SSF Files Helpwelcome 392
Check SSF Files utilitychecking
how to 393closing 395overview 392starting 392
checkingSSF files 393, 394, 395
Choose an existing batch setup 318closing
Check SSF Files utility 395Combine utility 373Connection Manager utility 29Differential Correction utility 250Grouping utility 360SSF Record Editor 382the Batch Processor 317
code processing 228code processing options
when differentially correcting files 257
code processing rover files 281Combine utility
and how it affects differential correction 293
closing 373starting 369using 370
combiningdata files 370, 371, 372
command line syntax 416communication settings 46configuration file
locking 56password settings 52print preview 54printing 55saving 50
438 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 441: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/441.jpg)
Index
unlocking 56Configuration Manager utility
overview 32starting 33
configuringthe Connection Manager utility 23,
24Connection Manager utility
before using 21closing 29configuring 23operation of 26starting 20, 29
conversion settings 411converting
.ssf files to RINEX format 402text strings 408
coordinate systemchanging on GeoExplorer 3
handheld 42used in the Differential Correction
utility 275copying
group of controls 56records to clipboard 383, 384, 385
corrected data fileslocation of 256
corrected filesgenerating 249output settings 277
CORS site 269Create a new batch setup 319Create new export setup 338creating
features from input files when there is no data dictionary 364
D
data collectioncorrection errors 295occupation period 230
data collectordistances to base station 228
data fileschecking 396
how to 393combining
how to 370selecting .ssf files to convert to
RINEX 403statistics of
in SSF Record Editor 382data logger
automatically transferring files from 26
data settings for GeoExplorer 3 handheld 36Data Transfer 326Data Transfer utility
adding a new device 108adding a new e-mail device 132almanac file 201ASPEN software 175background file 202base station file 203component mode 65configuration file 204connection settings 92coordinate system file 205coordinate systems 207current almanac 103data collectors 145data dictionary file 208downloading settings 96e-mail 186ephemeris file 209geoid grid file 210
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 439
![Page 442: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/442.jpg)
Index
GIS data file 211GIS folder 183global settings dialog 90GPS receivers 191help file 213language file 214list of the devices 91loading background files 101main dialog 85other files 215problems 220raw observations 216receiving waypoints 104selecting a coordinate system 101sending waypoints 106standalone mode 63station/session table 217TerraSync software 179troubleshooting 220types of devices 68, 142types of files 200using 63waypoint file 218
Delete a batch setup 325Delete an export setup 342deleting
base station provider 262device
monitoring 29Differential Correction 328differential correction
before performing 420, 433effect of settings in the Combine
utility on 293effect of settings in the Group utility
on 293effect of settings in the SSF Record
Editor utility on 293problems with 293processing options 257
reasons for file rejection 231synchronized measurements 230types of errors 295types of errors that can be removed
by 294using the Batch Settings wizard 313
Differential Correction Helpwelcome 226
Differential Correction Options dialog 329Differential Correction Settings dialog 330Differential Correction utility
closing 250overview 226settings 251starting 238
differential GPS 227displaying
currently-selected base station provider 262
distancesbetween base station and roving
receiver 228
E
Edit menuin Configuration Manager 56in SSF Record Editor 383
elevation masksetting to avoid low satellites 229
errorscorrection 295, 296, 297differential correction 293effect of settings on differential
correction 293file interval errors 231types of 294
exitingCheck SSF Files utility 395Combine utility 373
440 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 443: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/443.jpg)
Index
Connection Manager utility 29Differential Correction utility 250Grouping utility 360the Batch Processor 317the SSF Record Editor 382
Export 337Export Setup dialog 339exporting files
using the Batch Settings wizard 315external devices
communication settings 46
F
featurescreating from input files when there is
no data dictionary 364File Menu 348File menu
in Configuration Manager 35in SSF Record Editor 380
files.cor files 256.nav 405.obs 405.RINEX 402.ssf 402.ssf files 252.zip 285Base files 235, 236rover files 252, 253saving in SSF Record Editor 381
findinga record type in a .ssf file 385
format settings for the GeoExplorer 3 handheld 45
FTP site xvii
G
generatingcorrected rover files 249
GeoExplorer 3 handheldbeep volume settings 48communication settings 46coordinate settings 42format settings 45NMEA settings 48RTCM settings 41specifying how data is collected 36unit settings 43
GPSdifferential 227multipath 228types of errors that can be
removed 294GPS receivers
occupation period 230GPS settings for GeoExplorer 3 handheld 39group
copying 56locking 56pasting 56unlocking 56
grouping methodminimum time break option 365when processing input files in
Grouping utility 364Grouping utility
and how it affects differential correction 293
closing 360settings 361starting 356using 358when to use 354
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 441
![Page 444: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/444.jpg)
Index
H
Help Menu 352Help menu
in SSF Record Editor 391Help, context-sensitive xvi
I
input filesselecting .ssf files to convert to
RINEX 403selecting files to combine 374selecting files to group 361selecting to check 399selecting to convert 409
installation 304Internet
problems 299, 300Internet search
automatically selecting base files from the Web 242
overview 286performing 291performing for the first time in
Differential Correction 286Internet server 266Introduction 305
L
local search 241local search for base files 259locking configuration file 56log file
created by Check SSF utility 400logging intervals 231
M
Modify the properties of an existing batch setup 323
Modify the properties of an existing export setup 341
monitoringdevice 29
multipath 228
N
NMEA settings 48
O
occupation period 230online Help xviopening
.ssf file 380output files
after they have been combined 375after they have been converted 410after they have been converted to .ssf
format 404after they have been grouped 363
Overview dialog 321
P
password settings 52pasting
group 56Pathfinder Office settings 54PDOP 229port settings 47positions
filtering 387
442 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 445: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/445.jpg)
Index
precision estimatesoverview 232
print previewof configuration file 54
print setup 54printer setup
font 54font when printing from SSF Record
Editor 382printing
configuration file 55records from SSF Record Editor 382
problemsData Transfer utility 220
processing filesoptions when in differentially
correcting files 257selecting files to group 361selecting input files to combine 374
processing files using the Batch Processor 307
propertiesof data file in SSF Record Editor 382
Q
quickmarks 384
R
readme.txt file xvireal-time data collection settings 41receivers
see GPS receivers 230records
filtering 387undeleting selected records 383viewing by time 390viewing by type 386
reference positionconfirming adjustments 248, 275Reference Position dialog 272setting 246setting from a base file 274settings 273settings for base station 265
reference position coordinates 275release notes xviRINEX files
converting from .ssf files 402settings for converting from .ssf
files 406rover files
confirming selected 271correcting 249recommended logging intervals 231selecting base files 240selecting to differentially correct 239,
252roving receiver
distances to base station 228RTCM settings 41
S
satellite signalsreflection of 228
satelliteselevation of 229filtering 387minimum number required 228PDOP mask 229
savingconfiguration files 50current configuration file with a
different name/location 51current data file in SSF Record
Editor 381
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 443
![Page 446: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/446.jpg)
Index
current file in SSF Record Editor 381searching
for a record type in a .ssf file 385for base files 254locally for base files 258on computer for base files 244
Select base files manually 336Select input files manually 327setting up
the Connection Manager 25smart code processing options
when differentially correcting files 257
SNR 229sorting
data files to combine 376SSF Record Editor
and how it affects differential correction 293
closing 382main window 379main window - splitting 390starting 378status bar 391toolbar 391
SSF to RINEX utilityoverview 402settings 403starting 402
SSF to RINEX utility Helpwelcome 402
Standalone utilitiesusing 415, 416
startingBatch Processor 305, 306Check SSF Files utility 392, 393Combine utility 369, 370Configuration Manager utility 33Connection Manager 20, 21Differential Correction utility 238
Grouping utility 356SSF Record Editor 378SSF to RINEX utility 402Text Conversion utility 408
statistics 429, 430Status Bar 348status bar
in Configuration Manager 57in SSF Record Editor 391
T
textconverting 408
Text Conversion Helpwelcome 408
Text Conversion utilityoverview 408settings 409starting 408
time periodviewing records by 390
Toolbar 347toolbars
in Configuration Manager 57in the SSF Record Editor 391
transferringbackground files to a GIS device 78coordinate system to a GIS device 80files from a GIS device 69files to a GIS device 74waypoint files from a GIS device 84waypoint files to a GIS device 82
transferring filesautomatically 26
troubleshootingData Transfer utility 220
444 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 447: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/447.jpg)
Index
U
unit settings for GeoExplorer 3 handheld 43unlocking configuration file 56update notes xviUser command 343utilities
ADJUST2D 417, 418ASTOSSF 419Configuration Manager 32DATREF 420, 421FOUR2SSF 422, 423Grouping 354LOAD 424, 425, 426MULTIDAT 427, 428PFSTAT 429, 430RAWTOSSF 431RPDD 432SSF to RINEX 402SSFREF 433, 434SSFTOASC 435, 436Standalone utilities
list of 414
V
View menuin Configuration Manager 57
viewingrecords by time 390records by type 386
W
watchingdevice 29
windowsin SSF Record Editor 379, 390list of configuration files 58
World Wide Web site xv
Z
zipped files 285
GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3 445
![Page 448: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/448.jpg)
Index
446 GPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3
![Page 449: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/449.jpg)
Reader Comment FormGPS Pathfinder Office User Guide – Volume 3March 2001 P/N: 31312-28-ENG Revision: B
We appreciate your comments and suggestions for improving this publication. Contributors of particularly helpful evaluations will receive a thank-you gift.I use the following Trimble product_______________________________________________
for _________________________________________________________________________
Please circle a response for each of the statements below:1 = Strongly Agree 2 = Agree 3 = Neutral 4 = Disagree 5 = Strongly Disagree
The manual is well organized. 1 2 3 4 5
I can find the information I want. 1 2 3 4 5
The information in the manual is accurate. 1 2 3 4 5
I can easily understand the instructions. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual contains enough examples. 1 2 3 4 5
The examples are appropriate and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The layout and format are attractive and useful. 1 2 3 4 5
The illustrations are clear and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual is: too long just right too short
Please answer the following questions:Which sections do you use the most? _____________________________________________
What do you like best about the manual? __________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
What do you like least about the manual? __________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Optional
Name ______________________________________________________________________
Company ___________________________________________________________________
Address_____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Telephone ____________________________ Fax __________________________________
Please mail to the local office listed on the back cover or to Trimble Navigation Limited, Mapping & GIS Systems, 645 North Mary Avenue, Post Office Box 3642, Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642. Alternatively, e-mail your comments and suggestions to [email protected]. All comments and suggestions become the property of Trimble Navigation Limited.
![Page 450: Manual GPS Pathfinder Office](https://reader031.vdocuments.us/reader031/viewer/2022022208/544d72efaf7959ec178b4ad1/html5/thumbnails/450.jpg)